JP2016179317A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of performing more preferable control in a configuration in which a specific performance is performed by plural times of variable displays.SOLUTION: A pachinko machine 10 comprises: condition establishment detection means for detecting establishment of a predetermined condition; main control means for performing a lottery of whether or not a special game state is generated; and variable display means for performing variable display which teaches a lottery result. The game machine further comprises: winning/loss random number generation means used in the lottery; and winning value storage means for storing a value of the winning/loss random number generation means which is won in the lottery. Then, first winning/loss determination processing for determining whether or not, the value of the winning/loss random number generation means extracted based on the detection of the condition establishment detection means matches the value of the winning value storage means, specific performance determination processing for determining whether or not a specific performance is executed by plural times of variable displays on the base of the result of the first winning/loss determination processing, and second winning/loss determination processing for determining whether or not a special game state is generated based on the result of the first winning/loss determination processing prior to execution of the variable display, are executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, whether or not a hit state is generated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters a start ball entering means provided in a game area where a game ball launched by a launcher is guided) The result of the lottery determination is taught by performing variable display on the variable display device and stopping the variable display after a predetermined time. When winning in the winning / losing lottery, a win state that is advantageous to the player occurs after the variable display, and the player can acquire a gaming value (prize ball, etc.) (for example, patent document) 1).

  Here, in a plurality of continuous variable displays, for example, there is a display effect (so-called continuous notice) in which an effect display related to each other is derived (for example, a similar character is derived). When the continuous notice is given, a sense of expectation that a winning gaming state will occur will be maintained over a plurality of variable displays, so that the interest can be improved.

JP 2003-154110 A

  By the way, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, more suitable control is desired.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is a gaming machine capable of performing more suitable control in a configuration in which a specific effect is performed by a plurality of variable displays. Is to provide.

The gaming machine of the present invention is
Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established;
Based on the detection of the condition establishment detection means, a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and a main control means for generating a special gaming state when winning in the lottery,
Variable display means for performing variable display for teaching the result of the lottery,
Random number generating means used for the lottery,
As a value to be won in the lottery, winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the success / failure random number generating means;
A holding storage area having a plurality of holding areas capable of storing predetermined information used to determine the content of variable display in the variable display means,
A discriminant value extraction process for extracting the value of the random number generation means based on the detection of the condition establishment detection means;
A discriminant value storing process for storing the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the discriminant value extracting process in any of the reserved areas of the reserved storage area;
A first success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process matches a value stored in the winning value storage means;
A result storage process for storing a result of the first determination result;
A specific effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect in a plurality of variable displays, based on the result of the first success / failure determination process;
Prior to the execution of the variable display in the variable display means, a second winning / failing determination process for determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state based on the result of the first winning / failing determination process;
A variable display setting process for performing a variable display setting based on a result of the second determination result;
A first game mode in which the lottery is performed with a predetermined first probability as a probability of winning the special game state;
There is a second game mode in which the lottery is performed with a second probability that the probability of winning the special gaming state is higher than the first probability,
The game mode is switchable so that the game mode is different before the special game state occurs and after the special game state ends.
In the first success / failure determination process,
A common winning value determination process for determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means is a value to be won in the lottery in either the first game mode or the second game mode;
A limited winning value for determining whether or not the value of the random number generation means is a value that is won in the lottery in the second game mode, but is a value that is not won in the lottery in the first game mode. Discrimination processing;
A first determination result setting process in which the first winning / failing determination result holding unit is set to a positive determination state when an affirmative determination is made in the common winning value determination process;
A second determination result setting process for setting the second winning / failing determination result holding means to an affirmative determination state when an affirmative determination is made in the limited winning value determination process, in either the first game mode or the second game mode. Run even if there is
In the second success / failure determination process,
Determining whether or not it is the first game mode, and determining whether or not it is the second game mode;
A first game mode time determination process for determining whether or not the first determination result holding unit is in an affirmative determination state when it is determined in the mode determination process that the first game mode is set;
When it is determined in the mode determination process that the game mode is the second game mode, it is determined whether or not the first determination result holding means or the second determination result holding means is in an affirmative determination state. It is characterized in that the two-game mode determination processing is executed.

  The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine.

  According to the present invention, more suitable control can be performed in a configuration in which a specific effect is performed by a plurality of variable displays.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment (first embodiment). It is a perspective view which shows a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view which shows structures, such as an inner frame and a game board. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame, the back pack unit, etc. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the main electrical structures of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a NMI interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a jackpot determination process. (A) is a flowchart which shows a 2nd mode determination process, (b) is a flowchart which shows a 1st mode determination process. It is a flowchart which shows reach determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows a through gate passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows discrimination | determination information setting processing. (A), (b) is explanatory drawing which shows various table structures. It is a flowchart which shows a variable winning apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd display control process. It is a flowchart which shows an opportunity corresponding unit control process. It is a flowchart which shows a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a sub control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for the determination of a decoration design. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of a counter. It is a flowchart which shows holding information storage processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd continuous notification setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st continuous notification setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding process. It is a flowchart which shows a notice classification setting process. It is explanatory drawing of a notice table. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the main controller in another embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in another embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit random value determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the success / failure determination table of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a reach random number value determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd continuous notice setting process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st continuous advance notice setting process of 2nd Embodiment.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. Here, FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view, and FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame set 14 are opened. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the configuration of the inner frame 12, the game board 30, and the like. FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12, the back pack unit 203, and the like are opened. However, in FIG. 3, for the sake of convenience, nails and accessories placed on the surface of the game board 30, a glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, and the like are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that constitutes an outline of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 12 is supported at one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be opened and closed. .

  As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 has an upper side frame constituting portion 11a and a lower side frame constituting portion 11b made of a wooden plate material, and the left side frame constituting portion 11c and the right side frame constituting portion 11d are made of aluminum alloy. Each of the frame components 11a to 11d is assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole by a detachable fastener such as a screw.

  An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame constituting portion 11c (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower hinges 81 and 82 support the upper and lower portions of the inner frame 12 so that the inner frame 12 can be rotated. As a result, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. And the inner frame 12 etc. are accommodated in the space part formed inside the outer frame 11.

  The right side frame constituting portion 11d is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that protrudes from the vicinity of the rear end portion in the width direction toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extending wall 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked are provided on the front surface side of the extending wall portion 83. Further, a pressing portion 86 that abuts on an inner frame opening detection switch 92 described later is provided on the lower receiving portion 85 so as to protrude toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

  Furthermore, a resin curtain decoration 87 is attached to the lower frame constituting portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the back of the upper surface of the curtain decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set up and down on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with the opening / closing axis serving as an axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 whose outer shape is rectangular, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed at the center of the resin base 38.

  A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. As with the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward with an opening / closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window 101 is formed at the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 1, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower tray 15 as a ball tray is provided at the lower center, and game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 are stored in the lower tray 15. It is possible. In addition, on the front side of the lower plate 15, a ball removal lever 25 for discharging the game ball from the lower plate 15 is provided. In addition, an effect button 125 with a built-in LED is provided on the left side of the lower plate 15, and by pressing the effect button 125, a corresponding effect is performed on a decorative symbol display device 42 described later. Or the production content is changed.

  On the right side of the lower plate 15, a game ball launching handle (hereinafter simply referred to as a handle) 18 protruding toward the front side is provided. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and an operation amount detection means (not shown) for detecting the operation amount of the operation unit of the handle 18.

  An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper plate 19 is a ball tray that temporarily stores the game balls and guides them toward a game ball launching device (hereinafter simply referred to as launching device) 60 as launching means, which will be described later, while being aligned in a row. When the upper plate 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower plate 15 via the lower plate communication passage 71 and the discharge port 16 described later.

  The upper plate 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122. Thereby, in the game hall or the like, when the ball lending button 121 is operated with a bill or a card inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, depending on the operation Rental balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not necessary for a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lending to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, so-called cash machine.

  Further, the upper plate 19 is provided with a ball removal button 123. When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper plate 19 and communicating with the lower plate 15 is opened and stored in the upper plate 19. The game ball is guided (dropped) to the lower plate 15. That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

  In addition, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing and controlling the light emission mode such as lighting and blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. For example, at the periphery of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided. In addition, error display lamps 104 that are turned on when a predetermined error occurs are provided on both sides of the annular illumination portion 102. In addition, a large number of small through holes are formed in the annular illumination portion 102 above the error display lamps 104 corresponding to the speakers SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14. .

  A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not attached to a pair of conventional front and rear rectangular glass plates separately in front and rear pairs, but is formed into a round shape as a whole and attached after being assembled.

  Next, the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is mounted on the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) on the rear side of the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached in a state in which the peripheral edge thereof is in contact with the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface portion of the game board 30 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38.

  Further, at the lower part of the front surface of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, below the window hole 39 (game board 30), a launch rail for guiding the launch device 60 and the game ball immediately after being launched from the launch device 60. 61 is attached. In the present embodiment, a solenoid-type firing device is employed as the firing device 60. In addition, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device that guides the game balls guided from the upper plate 19 one by one to the launching position of the launching device 60 by driving a built-in driving means (for example, a solenoid). 63 is provided.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 includes a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, a starting winning unit (starting port) 33, a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, a first special display device 43L, a second special display device 43R, and the like. It is disposed in a through hole formed by router processing, and is attached from the front side of the game board 30 with a wood screw or the like. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) various winning ports such as the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the start winning unit 33, etc., it is detected by various detection switches, and is sent to the upper plate 19 (or lower plate 15). A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. For example, when there is a ball entering the start winning unit 33, there are three balls when there is a ball entering the general winning slot 31, and when there is a ball entering the variable winning device 32. Fifteen game balls are paid out to the upper plate 19 (lower plate 15). In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and the game balls that have not won the various winning ports such as the general winning port 31 are discharged out of the game area through the out port 36. . In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as windmills (servants).

  The start winning unit 33 is provided at both sides of the upper winning opening 33a (first starting entering means) and the lower winning opening 33b (second starting entering means) as starting start means and the lower winning opening 33b. A pair of opening / closing members 33c for opening and closing is provided. The upper winning opening 33a allows a game ball to always enter, while the lower winning opening 33b is a game that flows down the gaming area by the opening / closing member 33c opening and closing in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined condition. The state can be changed between an open state in which a ball can enter and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter. As will be described in detail later, the start winning unit 33 is a first start winning switch serving as a condition establishment detecting means (entrance detecting means) for detecting each game ball that has entered the upper winning opening 33a and the lower winning opening 33b. 224a, a second start winning switch 224b, and when a game ball is detected by the start winning switch 224a, 224b, whether or not to generate a big hit state is determined, and a special display device 43L and 43R (and a decorative symbol display device 42 described later) are configured to perform variable display. And, when winning in the winning / losing lottery, a big win state (special game state) is given.

  In the present embodiment, the types of jackpot states include “probable jackpot”, “normal jackpot”, and “special jackpot”. In the jackpot states of “probable bonus jackpot” and “ordinary jackpot”, the variable winning device 32 is opened for 30 seconds, or eight game balls are won in the variable winning device 32 as one round. Repeated 15 times. On the other hand, in the big win state of “special probability change”, the variable winning device 32 is kept open for 0.4 seconds, and this is repeated twice. In other words, a big increase in the number of game balls can be expected in the jackpot states of “probabilistic jackpot” and “ordinary jackpot”. The number will be small (almost no increase in game balls can be expected).

  Further, when the “probability change jackpot” or “special probability change” occurs, a high probability state (probability change mode) is given after the jackpot state ends. On the other hand, when a “normal jackpot” occurs, a low probability state (time reduction mode, normal mode) is given after the jackpot state ends.

  In addition, although mentioned later in detail, in this embodiment, when the game ball enters the top winning opening 33a and the case where it wins the bottom winning opening 33b, it is a big hit that is awarded when winning in the winning lottery The distribution of status types is different. When the winning lottery with the game ball entering the top winning opening 33a is won, the winning lottery is divided into one of “probable big hit”, “normal big hit”, and “special odds”, and the lower winning mouth 33b When the winning / losing lottery with the entry of the game ball into is won, it will be distributed to either “probable jackpot” or “ordinary jackpot”.

  The first and second special display devices 43 </ b> L and 43 </ b> R are configured by 7-segment display devices and are installed on the right side of the variable winning device 32. Then, when the game ball enters the top winning port 33a of the start winning unit 33, the first special display device 43L performs switching display (variable display), and the game ball enters the lower winning port 33b. As a trigger, switching display (variation display) is performed on the second special display device 43R. Note that the display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by a main control device 261 as main control means described later.

  In addition, after the variable display is performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, whether or not a big hit is determined is displayed depending on the display mode (for example, characters) when the variable display is stopped. The For example, when a game ball wins the top winning opening 33a, “-” → “7” → “3” → “2” → “−” →... On the corresponding first special display device 43L. Switching display (fluctuation display) is performed at high speed (for example, every 4 msec), and when a predetermined time elapses, one of the display modes is stopped (for example, stopped for several seconds). Then, when the big hit lottery is won, any one of “7”, “3”, and “2” is displayed when the fluctuation is stopped, and a big hit state is generated.

  Specifically, when “probable big hit” is given, “7” is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and when “normal big hit” is given, the first Alternatively, “3” is stopped and displayed on the second special display devices 43L and 43R, and “2” is stopped and displayed on the first special display device 43L when “special probability change” is given (second special display device). “2” is not displayed in 43R).

  In addition, when either the first special display device 43L or the second special display device 43R is performing variable display or determination display, the other is turned off ("-" is displayed). However, if neither the change display nor the determination display is performed in either case, “-” is displayed in both cases.

  In addition, when a game ball newly wins the start winning unit 33 during the variation display of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, the corresponding variation display is performed at that time. It is the structure performed after the end of. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of variable displays to be held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, it corresponds to the game ball that won the top winning port 33a and the game ball that won the lower winning port 33b. Then, the variation display up to four times (total eight variation display) is put on hold. In addition, the number of times of holding is lit and displayed by the first holding lamp 46a and the second holding lamp 46b. If a new game ball wins the start winning unit 33 during the big hit state, the corresponding change display is also suspended.

  Basically, the variable display triggered by winning in the top winning opening 33a is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls have entered the top winning opening 33a and is digested in the order in which they entered, and the bottom winning opening 33b. The change display triggered by winning a prize is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls have entered the lower winning opening 33b and digested in the order in which they entered. However, when both the variable display triggered by winning in the upper winning opening 33a and the variable display triggered by entering the lower winning opening 33b are held (the first holding lamp 46a and the second holding hold) In the case where one or more lamps 46b are lit), the variable display triggered by the entry into the lower prize opening 33b is preferentially digested. In other words, unless all the variable displays triggered by winning in the lower winning opening 33b are digested, the variable display triggered by entering the upper winning opening 33a is not performed. For example, in the state where one first holding lamp 46a is lit, when a game ball enters the lower winning opening 33b and one second holding lamp 46b lights, the player enters the upper winning opening 33a. The change display that is triggered is postponed, and the change display that is triggered by the ball entering the lower prize opening 33b is performed first. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the fluctuation display triggered by entering the top winning opening 33a is also referred to as “first fluctuation display”, and the fluctuation display triggered by entering the lower winning opening 33b is referred to as “second fluctuation display”. Is also referred to.

  Further, the through gate 34 is configured such that game balls flowing down the game area can pass one by one. As will be described in detail later, the through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 that can detect a game ball passing through the through gate 34. When the game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, the through gate 34 is started. An open lottery for determining whether or not the winning unit 33 is in an open state is performed, and variable display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41. When the winning lottery is won, the start winning unit 33 (opening / closing member 33c) is opened for a specified time.

  The variable display device unit 35 includes a normal symbol display device 41 that variably displays triggered by the passage of the through gate 34, and a decorative symbol display device that variably displays in accordance with the variable display by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. 42 is provided. Further, the variable display device unit 35 indicates a variation indicating whether the variation display performed on the decorative symbol display device 42 corresponds to which of the top winning opening 33a and the lower winning opening 33b. A lamp 40, the first holding lamp 46a and the second holding lamp 46b, and a holding lamp 44 are provided. In the present embodiment, the special display devices 43L and 43R, the variation specifying lamp 40, and the decorative symbol display device 42 constitute a variable display device.

  The normal symbol display device 41 is configured so that “○” or “×” can be lit as a normal symbol. For example, each time a game ball passes through the through gate 34, the normal symbol is displayed as “O” → “×” → “○” →... Is displayed at high speed (change display). Then, when the change display is stopped for several seconds with the “◯” symbol (winning symbol), the start winning unit 33 is opened for a predetermined time. The display contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by a main control device 261 described later.

  In addition, when a game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display device 41, the corresponding fluctuation display is performed after the end of the fluctuation display at that time. It has become. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of the variable display to be held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, it is held up to 4 times, and the hold number is lit and displayed by the hold lamp 44. Yes.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is configured as a liquid crystal display device, and display contents are controlled by a sub control device 262 and a display control device 45 as sub control means described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the sub-control device 262 supports the auxiliary design based on the command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the results displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Display contents are determined, and display is performed by the display control device 45 described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is provided with, for example, three symbol display areas, upper, middle, and lower, and a plurality of types of symbols (numerals) are sequentially displayed (variably displayed) in each symbol display area. The symbols are stopped and displayed in order for each display region (for example, in the order of the upper symbol display region → the lower symbol display region → the middle symbol display region). For example, when the jackpot is determined by the main control device 261, a display corresponding to the jackpot is made on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and the symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. In combination, the symbols are stopped and displayed (for example, the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display region, the middle symbol display region, and the lower symbol display region are the same), and the big hit state is started.

  Further, when symbols are stopped and displayed in combinations corresponding to jackpots, the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area, for example, as a preceding stage. In this way, the state where the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area and the variable display is still being performed in the middle symbol display area is the reach state.

  If the big hit state does not occur even if the reach state occurs, the symbols different from the symbols stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area. In addition, in the case of “probability big hit” or “ordinary big win”, the numbers in the doublet are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 as described above, but in the case of “special probability change” A combination of predetermined numbers (hereinafter referred to as chance symbols) is stopped and displayed (for example, in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas, “3”, “4”, “ 1 ”is stopped and displayed).

  In addition, the variation specifying lamp 40 includes a blue light emitting LED and a red light emitting LED, and the decorative symbol display device 42 displays a variation display triggered by entering the top winning opening 33a. When the display is changed, the light is emitted in blue, and when the variable display is triggered by the entry into the lower prize opening 33b, the light is emitted in red.

  The variable display device unit 35 is provided with a center frame 47 so as to surround the decorative symbol display device 42. A ball entrance 151 is provided in the upper portion of the center frame 47, and a game ball that has entered the ball entrance 151 is formed inside the center frame 47 along the side of the decorative symbol display device 42. It is guided on a stage 153 formed below the decorative symbol display device 42 via a warp channel 152 extending vertically. The game ball guided on the stage 153 falls from the stage 153 to the front game area, or rolls on the stage 153 and then enters the pocket 154 formed at the center back side of the stage 153. . The pocket 154 communicates with a guide passage 155 that leads to a game area directly above the start winning unit 33 (upward winning opening 33a), and a game ball that has entered the pocket 154 has a relatively high probability. The start winning unit 33 (upward winning opening 33a) is entered.

  The variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won, and is in an open state in which a game ball can be won in the case of a big hit (occurrence of a special game state).

  The game board 30 includes an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52, and a rail 50 that guides a game ball launched from the launch device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30 is attached. As a result, the game balls fired in accordance with the turning operation of the handle 18 are guided through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 into a game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

  A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail constituting portion 51 (the upper left portion in FIG. 4). This prevents a situation in which the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area returns to the rail 50 again.

  In the present embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is interrupted at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is interrupted at the lower right portion of the game board 30. For this reason, the game area is defined by the inner peripheral surface of the rail 50 and the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the game ball launched by the launching device 60 may flow backward through the rail 50 until it passes through the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail constituting portions 51 and 52 are excluded from the game area. It is burned.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame set 14 below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate communication passage 71 connected from a payout mechanism portion 352 described later to the discharge port 16 of the lower plate 15, and an upper plate communication passage 73 connected from the payout mechanism portion 352 to the upper plate 19. In addition, there is a gap of a predetermined interval between the launch rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail unit 50 (outer rail constituting portion 52), and the ball path unit 70 receives a game ball dropped from the gap. A foul ball passage 72 for guiding to the lower plate 15 is formed. Thereby, if the game ball launched from the launching device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns to the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is returned to the lower plate 15 via the foul ball passage 72. Discharged.

  3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding a game ball paid out by a payout mechanism portion 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12, and an upper plate communication passage 73 (upper plate 19). And a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67. When the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 protrudes forward by an urging force of a spring or the like so that the outlet of the payout passage 67 is almost closed. ing. When the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the inlet side rear end of the lower plate communication path 71. In addition, the inlets (sphere inflow portions) of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and in the closed state of the front frame set 14, each of the inlets and the discharge passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance. A game ball can pass through the gap between the two. For this reason, when the upper plate 19 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls to be dispensed flow to the lower plate communication passage 71 side (overflow to the inlet side of the lower plate communication passage 71), and the lower plate connection It will be paid out to the lower plate 15 through the passage 71.

  In addition, the ball path unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects a game ball located in the lower dish communication path 71. Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is grasped that the lower plate 15 is full of game balls (the lower plate 15 is full of game balls, and the game ball stays in the lower plate communication path 71). be able to. In the present embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined time by the full detection switch, the control of prohibiting the launching device 60 from being launched is performed. When the game ball stays in the lower tray communication path 71 and the game ball is not detected by the full detection switch (when it is not detected continuously for a predetermined time), the launching device 60 is allowed to be launched.

  Next, the back configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. Various control boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 10 so as to be lined up, down, left and right, and partially overlapped in the front and back, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls And a protective cover made of resin. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally sometimes referred to as a back pack. Therefore, this unit is referred to as a “back pack unit 203”.

  First, the back configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, on the back side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, a resin frame cover that covers the center frame 47 from the back side. 213 is provided to protrude rearward. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, a decorative symbol display device 42, a display control device 45, and a sub control device 262, which are liquid crystal display devices facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, can be attached and detached in a state where they are stacked in front and back. Is attached.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is housed in a housing box 42 a in which an opening for exposing the display unit (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative symbol display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is formed, and the rear surface of the frame cover 213. It is fixed on the side. The display control device 45 is accommodated in the substrate box 45a and fixed to the back side of the decorative symbol display device 42 (accommodation box 42a). The sub-control device 262 is accommodated in the substrate box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (substrate box 45a). In the frame cover 213, an LED control board for driving LEDs and the like built in the center frame 47 is disposed. The storage box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

  Under the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the start winning unit 33 and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 includes a ball collection mechanism (not shown) for collecting game balls that have won prizes in various winning ports. The game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 described later, and discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main controller 261 is mounted is pivotally supported with respect to the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

  The main controller 261 is accommodated in a substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The board | substrate box 263 connected with the sealing member becomes a structure which cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily find out that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

  In addition, the game board 30 corresponds to various winning ports such as a general winning port 31 as a winning means and detects a game ball that has entered the various winning holes (entrance detecting means). Is provided. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a winning opening switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31, and a count switch 223 is provided in the variable winning device 32. The start winning unit 33 includes a first start winning switch 224a (first condition establishment detecting means) and a second start winning switch 224b (second condition establishment detection) corresponding to the upper winning opening 33a and the lower winning opening 33b, respectively. Means). Further, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

  Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board that is electrically connected to the prize opening switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via a cable connector. . This first board surface relay board relays the prize opening switch 221 and the like and the main control device 261 as main control means, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector.

  On the other hand, the start winning switches 224a and 224b that detect a ball entering the starting winning unit 33 (upper winning port 33a or lower winning port 33b) are directly connected to the main controller 261 via the connector cable without passing through the relay board. It is connected.

The detection results detected by the various entrance detection switches are taken into the main controller 261. Then, a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) corresponding to the winning situation at each time is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are based on the output signal from the payout control device 311. Is dispensed (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).
In addition, although not shown in the drawings, the back of the game board 30 is provided with a large winning opening solenoid that opens the large winning opening by the variable winning apparatus 32, and the start winning unit 33 has a pair of opening / closing members 33c. A winning opening solenoid that opens and closes is provided. The back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board surface relay board (not shown) that relays between the solenoid and the main controller 261.

  Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is a unit in which a back pack 351 formed of resin and a payout mechanism portion 352 for a game ball are integrated. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward with an open / close axis extending along the vertical direction as an axis. ing. In addition, an external relay terminal plate 240 is provided in the upper left part of the back pack unit 203 (upper right part in FIG. 5).

  The external relay terminal board 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer or the like in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, no reference numeral is given, but for example, a terminal for outputting information on the current gaming state (such as a big hit state or a high probability state), the front frame set 14 detected by the opening detection switches 91 and 92 described later, A terminal for outputting information relating to the opening of the frame 12, a terminal for outputting information relating to various error states such as a ball entry error, a lower tray full tank error, a tank ball no error, a payout error, and the payout from the payout control device 311 A terminal for outputting information on the number of winning balls is provided.

  The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in the present embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 covers the upper portion and the right portion of the substrate box 263 (the left portion in FIG. 5). Thereby, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided at the right part of the board box 263 and the terminal part (board side connector) provided along the upper edge part of the main controller 261 are covered. It will be.

  The payout mechanism 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover 354. That is, a tank 355 opened upward is provided above the protective cover portion 354, and game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 that has two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and that is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected. Further, a case rail 357 is formed vertically on the downstream side of the tank rail 356. It is connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are paid out appropriately according to a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. Then, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

  The payout mechanism 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 for relaying a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power from the outside. Yes. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, an AC 24V main power supply via a voltage converter, and the power switch 382a is switched on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

  Below the back pack unit 203 (substrate box 263), there is provided a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported at the left side of the inner frame 12 (right side in FIG. 5) and can be opened rearward. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow, and a game ball is placed in the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed. In other words, the game balls that have won the respective winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 are gathered through the ball collecting mechanism of the back frame set 215 and further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217. In addition, the out port 36 leads to the discharge passage portion 217 in the same manner, and the game balls that have not won any winning port are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured separately and can be opened and closed independently. However, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It is also good to do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the payout control device 311, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 are detachably attached to the back side of the lower frame set 251 in a state where they are overlapped in the front-rear direction. It has been.

  The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are accommodated in the substrate box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. Although the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices for convenience, they are actually configured by a single board (printed board).

  The payout control device 311 is housed in the substrate box 311a and is fixed to the back side of the substrate box 313a (the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The substrate box 311a in which the dispensing control device 311 is accommodated is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the substrate box 263 in which the main control device 261 is accommodated, so that an unsealed trace of the substrate box 311a remains. It has become.

  In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is accommodated in the board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313).

  Each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

  Further, the dispensing control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 that protrudes outward from the substrate box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogged in the payout motor unit, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state).

  Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the substrate box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that even if a power failure occurs, the pachinko machine 10 retains the state at the time of the power failure and can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure (power recovery). it can. Therefore, if the power is turned off in the normal procedure (for example, at the end of the game hall), the state before the power is turned off is stored. .

  As shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1 and the like) exposed on the front surface side of the front frame set 14, and a key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 700, and the inside is operated by rotating to one side. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating to the other side. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

  In addition, as described above, the extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 is formed in the right side frame constituting portion 11d of the outer frame 11 (FIG. 5). reference). Thereby, it becomes difficult to make a wire etc. approach from the back side of outer frame 11, and to operate locking device 600 with the wire etc. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Further, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided on the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the launching device 60). As shown in FIG. 5, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided on the lower right side on the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). Each of the front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 includes a detection unit that can move in and out of the switch main body, and the front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame opening detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection unit faces rearward. When the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch main body, an ON signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detection unit is pressed toward the switch main body and is immersed in the switch main body, an OFF signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261. That is, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the front frame opening detection switch 91 is turned off when the detection unit is pressed on the back surface of the front frame set 14, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection unit returns to the protruding state. Turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is turned off by the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11 and is detected when the inner frame 12 is opened. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. A main controller 261 (main board) as main control means is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer as an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. Various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. However, the CPU, the ROM, and the RAM may not be integrated into one chip but may be configured as a chip for each function.

  The RAM 503 is a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501, the return address of a control program executed by the CPU 501, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I / O values, and the like. ) And a backup area 503a.

  The RAM 503 is configured to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 503a. All data is backed up.

  In the backup area 503a, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned on again. (Similarly) is an area for storing stack pointers, values of registers, I / O, and the like. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process. Conversely, the return of each value written to the backup area 503a is the main process at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, and so on). Executed in Note that a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 when a power failure occurs due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Due to the occurrence, the power failure process (NMI interrupt process) is immediately executed.

  Note that if data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 incorporating the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub-control device 262, first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, a normal symbol display device 41, and the like are connected to the input / output port 505. With this configuration, the special display devices 43L and 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 described above are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262.

  In addition, for convenience, illustration of various relay boards and the like is omitted, but the input / output port 505 includes various detection switches such as a prize opening switch 221, a count switch 223, start winning prize unit switches 224a and 224b, a through gate switch 225, Various electrical components such as various substrates are connected. That is, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, and the input / output port 505 is configured by these terminal portions.

  A sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic device, various control programs executed by the CPU 551, a ROM 552 that stores fixed value data, and a control program that is stored in the ROM 552. RAM 553, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data during execution, input / output port 554, bus line 555, and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit (not shown) It has. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

  A CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input / output port 554 via a bus line 555 and a display control device 45 is connected. Further, the speaker SP, the effect button 125, various illumination units, and the lamps 102 to 104 are connected to the input / output port 554.

  The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261 and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display the display control device. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main control device 261 display whether or not the big hit, and the sub control device 262 In the decorative symbol display device 42 to be controlled, display in accordance with the display of the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed.

  The payout control device 311 controls payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511, various flags and counters, A work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored, and a backup area 513a are provided.

  The RAM 513 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a. Data is backed up. Note that if data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  The backup area 513a has a stack pointer, each register at the time of power off, each register, so that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned off. This is an area for storing values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process, and the restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed in the main process when the power is turned on. As with the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the power failure signal SK1 is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  In the work area, a payout permission flag for which the payout control device 311 is set to allow the payout of prize balls, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and the main control device 261 And a command buffer for storing a command transmitted from.

  The payout permission flag is a flag for setting a prize ball payout permission, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and received, and is initially set. It is turned off when it is restored before the process or power shutdown. In the present embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command for instructing the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command for instructing payout of a prize ball, and the main controller 261 having been restored to power. There are three payout return commands to be transmitted in this case.

  The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. Similar to the payout permission flag, an initial setting process or power-off is performed. It is turned off when returning to the front, and turned off when the command received by the command determination process is determined.

  The command buffer is configured by a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261.

  An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 incorporating the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 through a bus line 514 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main controller 261, a launch controller 312 and a payout device 358 are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively.

  The card unit connection board 314 includes a ball rental operation unit (a ball rental button 121 and a return button 122) on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, and a card unit (a ball rental unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. Are electrically connected to each other, and receive a ball lending operation command from the player and output it to the card unit. In a cash machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 can be omitted.

  The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 60, and the launch device 60 is permitted to drive when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, a firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, a sensor signal is detected that the player is touching the handle 18, and a firing stop switch that stops firing is operated. On the condition that it is not done, the launching device 60 is driven, and the game ball is launched at an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the handle 18.

  The display control device 45 executes the variable display of the decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with an instruction from the sub-control device 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. And. An input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, and a VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 through a bus line 530. An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and a decorative symbol display device 42 as a liquid crystal display device is connected to the output port 529.

  The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 526) is performed. Thereby, display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

  The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data. The work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is.

  The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524. The character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the decorative symbol display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 526 can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the respective timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display it.

  The power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And.

  The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operation power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside, generates + 12V power for driving various switches and motors, + 5V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. These + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. Note that operation power (+12 V power, +5 V power, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors and the like via a control device to which these are connected.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. The power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. Based on the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute a power failure process (NMI interrupt processing).

  The power supply unit 541 normally outputs an output of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the process at the time of a power failure even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Configured to maintain the value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears backup data in the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 in accordance with the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erase signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 323 pressed (including power-on due to power failure cancellation), the data in the respective RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. The

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as the main control means performs lottery using various counter information in the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a jackpot random number counter C1 as a success / failure random number generating means used for a jackpot lottery (whether or not lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state, and used to determine the type of the jackpot state A mode determination counter C2 as a mode type random number generation means and a winning type random number generation means to perform, and a variation selection counter C3 as a reach random number generation means used to determine whether or not to generate a reach state in the decorative symbol display device 42 The initial value random number counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the variation type counter used for determining the variation display time of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42). Lottery of CS1, CS2 and normal symbol display device 41 (opening / closing member 33c of start winning unit 33 is opened) It is set to be used and normal symbol random number counter C4 used for whether an open draw). Note that the variation selection counter C3 is also used for reach type lottery when the decorative symbol display device 42 is deviated and varied. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for variation pattern selection (effect pattern selection) of the decorative symbol display device 42. Specifically, the variation time of the special display devices 43L and 43R is determined according to the determined variation pattern, and the variation mode and variation time in the decorative symbol display device 42, that is, the effect pattern, are determined.

  Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

  The RAM 503 has a special fluctuation holding area as a holding storage area in which the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the mode determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3 are stored, and a normal fluctuation in which the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored. There is a reserved area. The normal variation holding area includes one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth areas).

  The special variable reserved area includes a first special variable reserved area and a second special variable storage area each having four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas), and one execution area. In each holding area of the first special variable holding area, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the mode determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3 are time-sequentially matched to the winning history of the game balls to the top winning opening 33a. Stored in In each holding area of the second special variable holding area, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the mode determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3 are time-sequentially matched to the winning history of the game balls to the lower winning opening 33b. Stored in In each holding area of the normal variation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series in accordance with the passing history of the game ball to the through gate 34. By adopting this configuration, the variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 can be suspended up to four times as described above.

  If each counter is explained in detail, the jackpot random number counter C1 as the success / failure random number generating unit is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (ie, 599) as the closing price, It is the structure which returns to 0 which is the lower limit of. Normally, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the big hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599), and is updated once for each timer interruption and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer. The value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the big hit random number counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the upper winning hole 33a or the lower winning hole 33b of the start winning unit 33 is changed to the first special variable holding area or the first 2 Stored in the special variable holding area. There are two types of random numbers that are big hits: a low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode, etc.) as the first game mode, and a high probability state (probability change mode) as the second game mode. In this embodiment, the number of random number values that are jackpots in the low probability state is two, the values are “7, 307”, and the random number values that are jackpots in the high probability state are The number is 20, and the values are “7 to 16, 307 to 316”. That is, in the low probability state, the winning lottery is won with a probability of 1/300 (a jackpot state occurs), and in the high probability state, the winning lottery is won with a probability of 1/30. In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a success / failure determination table as a winning value storage means that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot. In the present embodiment, there are two success / failure determination tables, and there are a first success / failure determination table storing “7, 307” and a second success / failure determination table storing “8-16, 308-316”.

  Here, various game modes will be described. In the present embodiment, the game mode (game state) is switched between the normal mode, the probability variation mode, and the time reduction mode.

  The normal mode refers to a normal state that is not the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode. Therefore, in the normal mode, the jackpot probability (winning probability in the jackpot state) is a normal low probability (for example, 1/300).

  In addition, the probability variation mode means that “7” is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R (the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42). Or “2” is stopped and displayed on the first special display device 43L (the chance symbol is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42), so that the “special probability change” occurs, and the jackpot probability after the jackpot ends Is a state that is higher than that in the normal mode (for example, 1/30). The probability variation mode is continued until the next jackpot state occurs.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the probability variation mode, not only the jackpot probability is increased, but also the variable display time in the special display devices 43L and 43R is shortened (the time is shortened). In addition, as compared to the normal mode, the opening time of the start winning unit 33 (opening / closing member 33c) per winning is longer and the number of opening is increased. As a result, the time period during which the start winning unit 33 is in the open state becomes longer, so that the game balls frequently enter the starting winning unit 33 (the lower winning opening 33b), and the big hit lottery continues. As a result, it will be in good condition. Therefore, the probability variation mode can be restated as a high probability, a time reduction, and a high pitching state.

  In the probability variation mode, the fluctuation time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shortened, or the probability that the “O” symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display device 41 (winning probability of the open lottery) is made higher than in the normal mode. It is good also as doing.

  The time reduction mode means that the first or second special display device 43L, 43R is stopped and displayed with “3” (the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed with a normal symbol other than a predetermined probability variation symbol). ), The game mode is set over a total of 100 variable displays performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R after the end of the jackpot state. The time reduction mode is a game mode in which the jackpot probability is as low as that in the normal mode, and the ratio of the open state to the closed state per unit time in the start winning unit 33 is higher than the ratio in the normal mode. That is, except for the difference in jackpot probability (winning probability in the jackpot state), the same state (low probability / time reduction / high pitched state) is obtained. In the time reduction mode, even if the big hit state does not occur, after the variable display is performed 100 times in total on the special display devices 43L and 43R, the mode is shifted to the normal mode.

  The mode determination counter C2 as the mode type random number generation means and the winning type random number generation means is incremented by 1 in the range of, for example, 0 to 19, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 19), and then reaches the lower limit value of 0. The configuration is back. In the present embodiment, the mode determination counter C2 determines which type of jackpot state, that is, “probable big jackpot”, “normal jackpot”, or “special probability big” is to be given.

  The ROM 502 is provided with a mode type determination table as a mode type determination value storage means that is referred to when determining which jackpot corresponds to the value of the mode determination counter C2. Further, as described above, in this embodiment, the distribution of the type of the big hit state is different between the case where the game ball has won the top winning opening 33a and the case where the game ball has won the bottom winning opening 33b. That is, in this embodiment, there are two mode type determination tables, and the first mode type determination table that is considered when a game ball wins the top winning opening 33a and the game ball wins the top winning opening 33a. There is a second mode type determination table that is considered in some cases. In this embodiment, the mode type determination table also functions as a winning type determination value storage unit.

  Specifically, when the game ball wins the top winning opening 33a, if the value of the mode determination counter C2 is “0-8”, the “probability big hit” is determined, and if it is “9-12”. The provision of “special probability change” is determined. If it is “13 to 19”, the provision of “normal jackpot” is determined. In other words, if the winning lottery with the winning of the top winning opening 33a is won, it becomes “probability big hit” with a probability of 45%, “special probability change” with a probability of 20%, and “ It is usually a big hit.

  On the other hand, when the game ball wins the lower winning opening 33b, if the value of the mode determination counter C2 is “0 to 12”, the “probable big hit” is decided, and if “13 to 19” is given, “the normal big hit” "Is determined. In other words, if the winning lottery with the winning of the lower winning prize opening 33b is won, it becomes “probability big hit” with a probability of 65% and “normal big hit” with a probability of 35% (“special probability change” Does not occur).

  The mode determination counter C2 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the mode determination counter C2 is stored in the mode determination counter buffer. The value of the mode determination counter C2 stored in the mode determination counter buffer is stored in the special change reservation area (first area) of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball has won the top winning port 33a or the lower winning port 33b. Stored in the special fluctuation holding area or the second special fluctuation holding area).

  Further, the variation selection counter C3 as the reach random number generating means is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 238), it returns to the lower limit value of 0. Yes. In this embodiment, after the reach is generated with respect to the decorative symbol by the variation selection counter C3, the final stop symbol is shifted by one by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped, and the last stop after the occurrence of reach is also performed. It is decided to draw “Reach other than front / rear detachment” where the symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol, and “Complete detachment” where no reach occurs. In this embodiment, the reach determination value storage that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the variation selection counter C3 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach state and which reach corresponds to the ROM 502. A reach determination table is provided as a means. In the reach determination table, a value of “0 to 238” is stored, C3 = 0, 1 corresponds to the reach out of front and back, C3 = 2 to 21 corresponds to the reach other than back and forth, and C3 = 22 to 238 is complete. It has a configuration that corresponds to a detachment.

  The fluctuation selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 is stored in the fluctuation selection counter buffer. The value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the variation selection counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area (first area) of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball is won in the upper winning opening 33a or the lower winning opening 33b of the start winning unit 33. Stored in the special fluctuation holding area or the second special fluctuation holding area).

  In addition, one of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 198), and then reaches the lower limit value. The other variation type counter CS2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 240, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 240) and then returns to the lower limit value of 0. It has become. In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as “first variation type counter”, and CS2 is also referred to as “second variation type counter”. This is also shown in FIG. The first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach type (reach pattern) of decorative symbols, such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and premium reach, and other rough symbol variation modes. A more detailed symbol variation mode such as an elapsed time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol) stops is determined. Accordingly, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode in combination by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

  In the present embodiment, when “big hit” occurs, one of normal reach, super reach, and premium reach is selected, and when “out-of-front reach” occurs, normal reach and super reach are selected. When either one is selected and “reach other than front / rear out” occurs, normal reach is selected. In addition, in the case of “completely off”, none of normal reach, super reach, and premium reach is selected.

  Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a normal process described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In addition, the magnitude | size and range of each counter are only examples, and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the big hit random number counter C1, the variation selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case.

  Further, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to the upper limit value (that is, after reaching 9 and to the lower limit value of 0). The random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired when the game ball passes through the left or right through gate 34. The number of random number values to be won is six and the range is “3 to 8.” When the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 to be won is acquired, the normal symbol display device 41 displays a variable display. Is performed for a predetermined time, the symbol corresponding to the winning (“◯” in this example) is stopped and displayed, and the start winning unit 33 (opening / closing member 33c) is in the open state for a predetermined time.

  In the present embodiment, the probability that the symbol corresponding to the winning is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 41, that is, the winning probability of the open lottery for determining whether or not the start winning unit 33 is in the open state is in any mode. But it is common. In the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, the variation display variation time performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is shortened compared to the normal mode.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is broadly divided into a main process that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. This processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 every 2 msec, for example.

  In FIG. 11, first, in step S301, reading processing of various winning switches is executed. That is, the state of various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 261 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  In step S302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

  In step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the mode determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are maximum values (in the present embodiment, 599, 19, When 238, 9) is reached, each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Thereafter, in step S304, a start winning process associated with winning the start winning unit 33 is executed. In step S305, a through gate passing process accompanying passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 is executed. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is temporarily terminated.

  Here, the start winning process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, the execution area of the special variable holding area and each holding area include a success / failure random number storage area for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the mode determination counter C2, and a variable selection counter C3. A reach random number storage area for storing values is provided. In the present embodiment, the random number storage area stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 using 2 bytes. Each of the winning type random number storage area and the reach random number storage area stores the value of the mode determination counter C2 and the value of the variation selection counter C3 using 1 byte. In the present embodiment, the winning type random number storage area corresponds to the mode type random number storage area and the winning type random number storage area.

  First, in step S501, it is determined from the detection information of the second start winning switch 224b whether or not the game ball has won the lower winning opening 33b. If an affirmative determination is made in step S501, in step S502, the value of the lower hold counter Nb that counts the number of variable display holds triggered by winning in the lower winning opening 33b is the upper limit (in this embodiment, “4”). ) Is determined. If a negative determination is made in step S502, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503, and the lower hold counter Nb is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S504, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the mode determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 updated in the random number updating process in the above step S303 are used as the first of the reserved areas in the second special variable reserved area. Store in the area. After step S504, the process proceeds to step S505.

  In step S505, a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special variable suspension area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. Details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S506, when it is determined in step S505 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, based on the value of the mode determination counter C2 newly stored in the second special variable holding area. The second mode determination process for determining the type of jackpot is performed. Details of the second mode determination process will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S507, when it is determined in step S505 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot, based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the second special variation holding area. Reach determination processing for determining the type of reach is performed. Details of the reach determination process will be described later.

  After step S507, a starting command setting process is performed in step S508. In the advance command, the fluctuation information stored on hold (predetermined information used to determine the contents of the fluctuation display) is displayed in a variable display triggered by either the winning winning opening 33a or the lower winning opening 33b. Information indicating whether or not it is variation information corresponding to jackpot, information indicating the type of jackpot, and information indicating the type of reach are included in the next external output process (see step S201). It is output to the control device 262. In the present embodiment, when a first or second success / failure flag, which will be described later, is turned on, information indicating that a big hit is set in the advance command (even if a third success / failure flag, which will be described later, is turned on) is not).

  Here, the details of the jackpot determination process in step S505 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not a high probability state flag, which will be described later in detail, is on, and whether or not it is in a high probability state. When an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, that is, in a high probability state, in step S5102, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special variable suspension area is a value corresponding to the jackpot (first (1) Value stored in the hit determination table) It is determined whether or not it matches either “7” or “307”.

  In FIG. 14, for convenience, the process of step S5102 is simplified, but actually, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is “7”, and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is “307”. If an affirmative determination is made in either of these determinations, an affirmative determination is made in step S5102, and which determination is made. If a negative determination is made in step S5102, a negative determination is made in step S5102.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5102, that is, if it is determined that a big hit state occurs, the first success / failure flag is turned on in step S5103, and then the present process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the success / failure random number storage area for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a separate success / failure flag is not provided, but information on whether or not a big success state occurs in the success / failure random number storage area. Is stored (overwritten). As described above, the success / failure random number storage area uses 2 bytes. In step S5103, “101010101010101010” is set for the success / failure random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for the sake of convenience, the setting for the success / failure random number storage area is referred to as turning on the first success / failure flag.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5102, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special variation holding area in step S5104 is (the value stored in the second winning / failing determination table) “8 to 16”. , 308 to 316 ”. Note that in the determination process, it is actually determined one by one whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 matches each value corresponding to the jackpot as described above.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5104, that is, if it is determined that a big hit state occurs in the high probability state, the second success / failure flag is turned on in step S5105, and then this process ends. Here, turning on the second success / failure flag means that “1100110011001100” is set for the success / failure random number storage area. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5104, that is, if it is “displacement”, the disengagement flag is turned on in step S5106, and then this process ends. Note that turning on the off flag here means that “01010101010101101” is set for the random number storage area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, that is, if the probability is low, it is determined in step S5107 whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 matches any of “7, 307”. If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if it is determined that a big hit state occurs, the first success / failure flag is turned on in step S5103, and then the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5107, that is, if it is “out” in the low probability state, in step S5108, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is “8-16, 308-316”. Determine whether they match. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5108, that is, it is “displaced” in the low probability state, but it is determined that a big hit state occurs in the high probability state, the third success / failure flag is turned on in step S5109. After this, this process is terminated. Note that turning on the third success / failure flag here means that “0011001100110011” is set for the success / failure random number storage area. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5109, that is, if it is “out”, after the out flag is turned on in step S5110 (after “01010101010101101” is set for the random number storage area), this processing Exit. Note that the detachment flag may be omitted (steps S5106 and S5110).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the information related to success / failure is stored using 2 bytes. For example, when noise occurs, the success / failure flag (the content stored in the failure random number storage area) is rewritten. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a big hit state is generated even though it is not a win, or a big win state does not occur even though it is a win. In addition, the pattern (a combination of “1” and “0”) set in the success / failure random number storage area in the big hit determination process is a pattern that is not used when the value of the big hit random number counter C1 is stored in the success / failure random number storage area. . In the present embodiment, a part of the lottery means (win / no lottery process) is configured by the function of the jackpot determination process (start winning prize process).

  Next, the second mode determination process in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5201, it is determined whether any of the first, second, and third win / fail flags is set in the jackpot determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5201 (there is no possibility of a jackpot state), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5201 (there is a possibility that a jackpot state will occur), in step S5202, the second mode type determination table is referred to and newly stored in the second special variation holding area. It is determined whether or not the value of the mode determination counter C2 matches any of the values “13 to 19” corresponding to “normal jackpot”. If a negative determination is made in step S5202, that is, if the value of the mode determination counter C2 is one of the values “0 to 12” corresponding to “probability big hit”, the probability change flag is turned on in step S5203. This process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the mode determination counter C2, a probability variation flag is not provided separately, but the winning type random number storage area is “probable big hit”. Information is stored (overwritten). As described above, the winning type random number storage area uses 1 byte. In step S5203, “10101010” is set for the winning type random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for convenience, the setting for the winning type random number storage area will be described as turning on the probability variation flag.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the normal flag is turned on in step S5204, and then this process ends. If the normal flag is turned on here, “01010101” is set for the winning type random number storage area.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first or second success / failure flag is turned on and the third success / failure flag is turned on in the low probability state in addition to the case where the high probability state or the low probability state is “big hit”. Even when it is determined to be “out”, the jackpot state type (winning type) is determined. The pattern (the combination of “1” and “0”) set in the winning type random number storage area in the second mode determination process is used when the value of the mode determination counter C2 is stored in the winning type random number storage area. It is a pattern that is not done.

  Next, the reach determination process in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the first win / fail flag is set in the jackpot determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if the jackpot is large in both the low probability state and the high probability state (a jackpot state always occurs), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if the big hit state does not occur in the low probability state (there is a possibility that it will be missed), in step S5302, the reach determination table is referred to, and a new 2. It is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the special fluctuation hold area matches one of the values “0, 1” corresponding to “front / rear out of reach”. If the determination in step S5302 is affirmative, in step S5303, the front / rear flag indicating the occurrence of front / rear out of reach is turned on, and then the process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3, a separate front / rear flag is not provided, but information indicating that “rear / rear reach” is in the reach random number storage area. Is stored (overwritten). As described above, the reach random number storage area uses 1 byte. In step S5303, “10101010” is set for the reach random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for convenience, the setting for the reach random number storage area will be described as turning on the front / rear flag.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5302, the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area in consideration of the reach determination table in step S5304 is “reach other than front / rear out”. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the values “2 to 21” corresponding to. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5304, the flag is turned on other than before and after in step S5305, and then the present process ends. Note that turning on the flags other than before and after here means that “11001100” is set for the reach random number storage area.

  Also, if a negative determination is made in step S5304, that is, if it is “completely out”, the process ends after turning on the complete out flag in step S5306. Note that turning on the complete removal flag here means that “01010101” is set for the reach random number storage area.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the case where the second winning / failing flag is turned on and it is determined that the winning state is determined in the high probability state, in addition to the case where the third winning / failing flag is turned on. In addition, the reach type is determined. Note that the pattern (a combination of “1” and “0”) set in the reach random number storage area in the reach determination process is a pattern that is not used when the value of the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the reach random number storage area. .

  Returning to the description of FIG. 13, after the process of step S508, or when a negative determination is made in step S501, in step S509, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the top winning opening 33a. The determination is made based on the detection information of the switch 224a. If a negative determination is made in step S509, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made, in step S510, the value of the upper hold counter Na that counts the number of variable display holds triggered by winning in the upper winning opening 33a is the upper limit (in this embodiment, “4”). ) Is determined. If a negative determination is made in step S510, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S510, the process proceeds to step S511, and the upper hold counter Na is incremented by one.

  In subsequent step S512, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the mode determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3 are stored in the first area among the vacant reserved areas in the first special variable reserved area. After step S512, the process proceeds to step S513.

  In step S513, a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 newly stored in the first special variable suspension area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. Note that the jackpot determination process in step S513 is the same as the jackpot determination process in step S505 described above, except that the information regarding the variable display to be processed is based on the ball entering the top winning opening 33a. Different. For this reason, detailed description is omitted for convenience.

  In the subsequent step S514, when it is determined in step S513 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, based on the value of the mode determination counter C2 newly stored in the first special variable holding area. First mode determination processing for determining the type of jackpot is performed. Details of the first mode determination process will be described later.

In the subsequent step S515, when it is determined in step S513 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot, based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the first special variation holding area. Reach determination processing for determining the type of reach is performed. Note that the reach determination process in step S515 is the same as the reach determination process in step S507, except that the information related to the variable display to be processed is based on the ball to the top winning opening 33a. . Therefore, for the sake of convenience, detailed description will be omitted. After step S515, in step S516, a start command setting process is performed, and this process ends.

  Next, the first mode determination process in step S514 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not any of the first, second, and third win / fail flags is set in the jackpot determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5401, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5401, in step S5402, the value of the mode determination counter C2 newly stored in the first special variation holding area is referred to as “normal jackpot” in consideration of the first mode type determination table. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the values “13 to 19” corresponding to “”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5402, the normal flag is turned on in step S5403 (after “01010101” is set for the winning type random number storage area), and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5402, the first mode type determination table is referred to in step S5404, and the value of the mode determination counter C2 is any one of values “9 to 12” corresponding to “special probability change”. Determine whether they match. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5404, the special flag is turned on in step S5405, and then the process ends. Note that turning on the special flag here means that “00110011” is set for the winning type random number storage area. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5404, the probability variation flag is turned on in step S5405 (after “10101010” is set for the winning type random number storage area), and then this process is terminated. The pattern (the combination of “1” and “0”) set in the winning type random number storage area in the first mode determination process is used when the value of the mode determination counter C2 is stored in the winning type random number storage area. It is a pattern that is not done.

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the top winning port 33a and the lower winning port 33b, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 is directly stored in the first and second special fluctuation holding areas, and then the big hit determination Although the process (step S509), the mode determination process (step S510), and the reach determination process (step S511) are executed, the present invention is not particularly limited to such a structure. For example, a temporary storage area that temporarily stores these counter values when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is obtained is provided, and for the information stored in the temporary storage area, the jackpot determination process, the mode determination process, and After the reach determination process is performed, a configuration may be adopted in which the corresponding first and second special variable hold areas are stored in the hold areas.

  In the present embodiment, the processes in steps S504 and S512 correspond to a determination value extraction process and a determination value storage process. The jackpot determination process (step S5101, step S5102, step S5104, step S5107, step S5108) of step S505 and step S513 corresponds to the first win / fail determination process. In the jackpot determination process, the process of setting the first to third hit / fail flags (step S5103, step S5105, step S5109) corresponds to the result storage process. A process of setting a starting command in steps S508 and S516 and outputting the starting command to the sub-control device 262 in step S201 constitutes a primary output process. The mode determination process in steps S506 and S514 corresponds to a first mode type determination process and a first winning type determination process. The reach determination process in steps S507 and S515 corresponds to the first reach determination process.

  Next, the through gate passing process in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on detection information of the through gate switch 225.

  If a negative determination is made in step S601, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the number of suspensions of the variable display performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is counted in step S602. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, if the passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed and the value of the normal holding counter Nc <4, the process proceeds to step S603, where the normal holding counter Nc is incremented by one.

  In subsequent step S604, a random number related to the success or failure is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated by the random number update process in step S303 is stored in the first area of the free storage area of the normal variation holding area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the through gate passing process is terminated.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interruption, the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power-off is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process. In step S401, the CPU 501 stores the power interruption occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and performs the NMI interruption process. finish.

  The above NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner in the payout control device 311, and information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the backup area 513 a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. The NMI interrupt process in FIG. 12 is started. The contents are as described above.

  Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is started upon reset when power is turned on.

  First, in step S101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, 1 is set in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control device (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable. Wait processing is performed for about 2 seconds. In the subsequent step S102, RAM access is permitted.

  Thereafter, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the process proceeds to step S112 to clear (erase) the backup data. To do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in the subsequent step S104 whether or not occurrence information of power supply interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, no backup data is stored, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to step S112. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. That is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in this case, the process also proceeds to step S112.

  In the process of step S112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub control device 262, the payout control device 311 and the like, which are the control devices on the sub side. Thereafter, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S113 and the like). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of the RAM determination value, it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly stored.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to a RAM initialization process (step S113, etc.). Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by a RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 503 (step S113 or the like). That is, the use area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0 in step S113, and the initial value of the RAM 503 is set in subsequent step S114. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed (step S103: NO), it is a condition that the information on occurrence of power interruption is set and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal. In addition, the process at the time of power recovery (process at the time of power failure recovery) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power interruption is restored, and in step S108, the information on the occurrence of the power interruption is cleared. In step S109, a command for returning the sub-side control device to the gaming state at the time of power-off is transmitted, and in step S110, the used register is returned from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

  Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, the processing of steps S201 to S210 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S211 and S212 is executed with the remaining time.

  First, in step S201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R, the start winning unit 33, etc. updated in the previous process is transmitted to each device, and output data such as a command is transmitted to each sub-side. External output processing that is transmitted to the control device is executed.

  For example, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol, a variation pattern command, a symbol command, or the like is transmitted to the sub-control device 262. That is, the variation pattern command and the symbol command are output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform a display effect in accordance with the display performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. And corresponds to the command information in the present embodiment. Therefore, the function of this external output process constitutes the command information output means in this embodiment. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 that has input the variation pattern command, the symbol command, etc. determines the variation mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the various commands, and displays the variation mode on the decorative symbol display device 42. An instruction is issued to the display control device 45 so as to display (variable display).

  For convenience, the variation pattern command and the like will be described here. The variation pattern command includes information for specifying the variation type of the decorative symbol such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. In the present embodiment, for example, in the normal mode, any one of “FF10”, “FF11”, “FF12”, “FF13”, “FF14”, “FF15”, “FF16”, “FF17” is used as the variation pattern command. Is set. In the probability variation mode, “FD10”, “FD11”, “FD12”, “FD13”, “FD14”, “FD15”, “FD16” are set, and in the time reduction mode, “FE10”, “FE11”, “FE12”, “FE13”, “FE14”, “FE15”, “FE16”, and “FE17” are set. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation types of the decorative symbols in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 executes the effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command.

  Hereinafter, the variation type of the decorative symbol and the correspondence between the variation type and the variation pattern command will be described.

  Normal reach is a reach pattern that does not display any special effects other than the variation of the decorative design. In the variation pattern command corresponding to the normal reach, “FF11” is set in the normal mode, “FD11” is set in the probability variation mode, and “FE11” is set in the time reduction mode. In this embodiment, the variable display time for which the normal reach is derived is set to “20 seconds” in the normal mode, “8 seconds” in the probability variation mode, and “10 seconds” in the time reduction mode.

  Super Reach is a reach pattern in which characters and the like are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbol during the variation display of the decorative symbol (after the reach state is established), thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. is there. In this embodiment, three types (super reach SR1, SR2, SR3) of 30 second, 40 second, and 50 second patterns are prepared for the super reach in the normal mode. The variation display time in the probability variation mode and the time shortening mode is shortened compared to the normal mode as in the normal reach. Corresponding to each reach pattern, in the case of super reach SR1, “FF12” in the normal mode, “FD12” in the probability variation mode, and “FE12” in the time reduction mode are set as the variation pattern commands. In the case of the super reach SR2, “FF13” in the normal mode, “FD13” in the probability variation mode, and “FE13” in the time reduction mode are set. In the case of the super reach SR3, “FF14” in the normal mode, “FD14” in the probability variation mode, and “FE14” in the time reduction mode are set.

  Premium reach is an effect that can be derived only when a big hit state occurs. During the decorative symbol variation display (after reaching the reach state), in addition to the decorative symbol, a character with a different pattern from the super reach is displayed. This is a reach pattern in which the player is expected to have a sense of expectation. In the premium reach of this embodiment, two types (premium reach PR1, PR2) of 60-second and 70-second patterns are prepared in the normal mode. The variation display time in the probability variation mode and the time shortening mode is shortened compared to the normal mode as in the normal reach. Corresponding to each reach pattern, in the case of premium reach PR1, “FF15” in the normal mode, “FD15” in the probability variation mode, and “FE15” in the time reduction mode are set as the variation pattern commands. In the premium reach PR2, “FF16” in the normal mode, “FD16” in the probability variation mode, and “FE16” in the time reduction mode are set.

  In addition, in the variation pattern command corresponding to “completely out” that does not reach any reach state, “FF10” in the normal mode, “FD10” in the probability variation mode, and “FE10” in the time reduction mode are set as the variation pattern commands. . In the present embodiment, the variable display time that is completely off is set to 10 seconds in the normal mode. Of course, the variable display time in the probability variation mode and in the time reduction mode is shortened compared to that in the normal mode as in the case of the normal reach.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when “special probability change” occurs, the decorative symbol display device 42 does not generate a reach state, and the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas have “3”. The symbols “4” and “1” (chance symbols) are stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, “FF17” in the normal mode and “FE17” in the time reduction mode are set as the variation pattern commands corresponding to “special probability variation”.

  Further, the sub-control device 262 determines a stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) based on the symbol command, and displays it after the fluctuation time has elapsed. The symbol command is a command for causing the sub-control device 262 to determine a stop symbol, a combination of probability variation symbols, a normal symbol combination, a front / rear off symbol combination, a front / rear off symbol combination, a complete out symbol design combination. 6 divisions, that is, combination of chance symbols, are designated. These divisions are indicated by, for example, “A1”, “A2”, “A3”, “A4”, “A5”, “A6”, and any of these is set as a symbol command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these commands and stop symbols in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 displays a stop symbol corresponding to the symbol command.

  Hereinafter, the stop symbol classification and the correspondence between the stop symbol and the symbol command will be described.

  The combination of probability variation symbols is a combination of symbols composed of numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 and “A1” is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of probability variation symbols. Then, when “A1” indicating the probability variation symbol is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 is one of the combinations of symbols consisting of the numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 in the form of a slot. Is determined as a stop symbol.

  The combination of normal symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of numbers 0, 2, 4, 6 and 8, and “A2” is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of normal symbols. Then, when “A2” indicating the normal symbol is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 is one of the combinations of symbols consisting of the numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8. Is determined as a stop symbol.

  The combination of back and forth symbols corresponds to the combination of back and forth symbols, where after reaching, the final stop symbol is stopped by one shift before and after the reach symbol. “A3” is set in the symbol command. The combination of symbols other than front / rear detachment corresponds to the “reach other than front / rear detachment” that occurs after reach occurs, and the final stop symbol stops other than before / after the reach symbol. “A4” is set in the command. The combination of complete detachment symbols corresponds to “complete detachment” in which no reach occurs, and “A5” is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of complete detachment symbols. In addition, “A6” is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of chance symbols. Incidentally, there is one type of chance symbol, and in this example, the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in each symbol display area are “3”, “4”, and “1” from the top.

  As will be described in detail later, when “A3” to “A5” are set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 stops the combination of symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553. Determine as. When “A6” is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 selects a chance symbol as a combination of decorative symbols. In this embodiment, three commands “A3” to “A5” are prepared as the symbol commands for removal. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration with only one symbol command for separation is also possible. Good.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 10, in step S202, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the upper limit values (198 and 240 in this embodiment). To do. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  In the subsequent step S203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

  Thereafter, in step S205, a first display control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are set as to what control is performed in the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, and the jackpot determination and decoration in the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed. A design variation pattern (effect pattern) is set. Details of the first display control process will be described later.

  In step S206, variable winning device control processing is executed. In this process, the control content of the variable winning device 32 is set as to what control is performed in the variable winning device 32. As a result, when the big win state (special game state) is reached, the opening / closing process of the big winning opening of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. Details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

  In step S207, the second display control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are set as to what kind of control is performed in the normal symbol display device 41. Details of the second display control process will be described later.

  In step S208, an opportunity handling unit control process is executed. In this process, the control content of the start winning unit 33 is set as to what kind of control is performed in the start winning unit 33.

  After that, in step S209, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if the occurrence information of power interruption is not set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step S210 whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached, that is, a predetermined time from the start of the previous normal processing (this embodiment) It is determined whether or not 4 msec) has elapsed. And if predetermined time has already passed, it will transfer to Step S201 and will repeat the processing after the above-mentioned Step S201.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process. Repeatedly execute (step S211, step S212).

  That is, in step S211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

  In step S212, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (198 and 240 in this example). Then, the change values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S209 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next execution timing of the normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, it is possible to update the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) at random by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, and similarly change The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

  Now, if the occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S209: YES), the power is cut off, so that the processing after step S213 is performed as a power failure process at the time of power interruption. Is called. In the power failure process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S213, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S214, and the value of the stack pointer is saved in the backup area 503a in step S215. To remember. Thereafter, in step S216, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (such as the payout control device 311). In step S217, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, RAM access is prohibited in step S218, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed.

  The process of step S209 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed at steps S201 to S208, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of steps S211 and S212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal process of the main controller 261, the occurrence information of the power interruption is confirmed at the end of each process, so that the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is less than that in the middle of each process. And can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. . Further, since the interruption processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S213), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is shut off and to reliably store the state before the power is shut off. .

  Next, the first display control process of step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In FIG. 18, in step S801, a jackpot flag, which will be described later, is referred to in detail to determine whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit. During the jackpot, during the jackpot state (special game state) and for a predetermined time after the jackpot state ends (the predetermined time after the jackpot state ends here is a normal game (special display device) after the jackpot state ends. 43L and 43R), and generally, this time zone is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 indicating the end of the jackpot state or the mode given after the jackpot). included. In addition, a period from when the variable display is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the jackpot on the special display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 until the variable winning device 32 (big winning opening) is opened. (In general, this time zone is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 to indicate the start of the big hit state) and is included in the big hit.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S801, that is, if the game is a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S801, in step S802, a first display that will be described in detail later The flag setting status is checked to determine whether the first or second special display device 43L, 43R (decorated symbol display device 42) is performing variable display. Specifically, when the first display flag is set (on state), it is regarded as a variable display, and when the first display flag is released (off state), the variable is displayed. It is considered that the stop display corresponding to the display stop state is in progress. As will be described in detail later, the first display flag is turned on when starting the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (see step S917), and the first and second special displays. It is turned off when the variable display of the devices 43L and 43R is stopped and displayed (see step S810).

  If a negative determination is made in step S802, that is, if there is no big win and further fluctuation display is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S803, and the fluctuation display (second fluctuation display) triggered by entering the lower prize opening 33b. It is determined whether or not the value of the lower hold counter Nb that counts the number of holds is greater than zero.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S803, that is, if at least one second variation display is held, 1 is subtracted from the lower hold counter Nb in step S804. In the present embodiment, when the second variation display is suspended and stored by the determination processing in step S803, the second variation display is executed without executing the first variation display. In other words, even when the first variation display is stored on hold earlier than the second variation display, the second variation display is preferentially digested (the first variation display is postponed). ing.

  In a succeeding step S805, a process for shifting the data stored in the second special variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the second special variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area. After step S805, in step S806, the process of causing the variation specifying lamp 40 to emit red light is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S807.

  If a negative determination is made in step S803, that is, if no second variation display is stored on hold, a variation display (first display) triggered by entering the top winning opening 33a in step S808. It is determined whether or not an upper hold counter Na for counting the number of hold (variable display) is greater than zero. If a negative determination is made in step S808, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S808, 1 is subtracted from the upper hold counter Na in step S809. In a succeeding step S810, a process for shifting the data stored in the first special variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the first special variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area. After step S810, in step S811, a process for causing the variation specifying lamp 40 to emit blue light is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S807. In the present embodiment, the execution area of the special variable reservation area is one, and the data stored in the first special variable reservation area and the second special variable reservation area are displayed when the variable display based on the data is performed. Therefore, it is shifted to a common execution area. In the present embodiment, the processes in steps S804 and S809 correspond to a shift process.

  In step S807, a variable display setting process is performed. Here, the details of the variable display setting process will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, step S901, step S902, and step S911 of the variable display setting process correspond to the second win / fail determination process. The processes in steps S903 and S906 correspond to a second mode type determination process and a second winning type determination process. The processes in steps S912 and S915 correspond to the second reach determination process. Further, the process of setting the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation display setting process and outputting the fluctuation pattern command to the sub-control device 262 in step S201 constitutes the secondary output process.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether the state is a high probability state by looking at the setting state of a high probability state flag, which will be described in detail later. If the determination in step S901 is affirmative, in step S902, the first, second, and third success / failure flags (refer to the jackpot determination process in FIG. 14) are considered in consideration of the success / failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable suspension area. ), It is determined whether or not a big hit is made. In the present embodiment, when starting the fluctuation display (when setting the fluctuation pattern command), the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot value (the value stored in the success / failure determination table), as in the past. Whether or not they match is not determined.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, that is, if it is determined that the winning lottery is won in a high probability state, the process proceeds to step S903, and the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable holding area is considered. Then, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (whether or not “10101010” is set for the winning type random number storage area). In the present embodiment, not only the case where it is determined that the winning is made in the high probability state (in the case where the first or second success / failure flag is on), but the low probability state is out of the low probability state. If the winning state is a winning state (when the third winning / failing flag is on), the type of winning state (winning type) is determined in advance in the start winning process. For this reason, it is not necessary to separately perform a mode determination process (determination of which value of the mode determination counter C2 matches the value of the mode type determination table) in the change start process.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S903, that is, if “probable variation jackpot”, the probability variation jackpot variation pattern is determined in step S904 and set in the variation pattern command. Thereafter, in step S905, the probability variation symbol ("A1" in this embodiment) is set as the symbol command, and the process proceeds to step S920.

  If a negative determination is made in step S903, the process proceeds to step S906, and whether or not the normal flag is turned on in consideration of the winning type random number storage area (“01010101” is set for the winning type random number storage area) Or not). If an affirmative determination is made in step S906, that is, if it is “ordinary jackpot”, a normal jackpot variation pattern is determined in step S907 and set in the variation pattern command. Thereafter, in step S908, the normal symbol (“A2” in the present embodiment) is set as the symbol command, and the process proceeds to step S920.

  In step S904 and step S907, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 are checked, and the decorative symbols are displayed based on the values of the first and second variation type counters CS1 and CS2. The pattern variation mode is determined. The relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the reach pattern (variation type) and the relationship between the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation time are defined in advance by a table or the like for each game mode.

  Here, the correspondence relationship between the numerical values of the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation type at the time of winning will be described. For example, at the big hit time in the normal mode, the correspondence is defined by a normal mode big hit table as shown in FIG. That is, when CS1 = 0 to 9, “FF11” (normal reach) is set in the variation pattern command regardless of the value of CS2. When CS1 = 10 to 196 and CS2 = 0 to 69, “FF12” (super reach SR1) is set in the variation pattern command. When CS1 = 10 to 196 and CS2 = 70 to 149, “FF13” (super reach SR2) is set in the variation pattern command. When CS1 = 10 to 196 and CS2 = 150 to 240, “FF14” (super reach SR3) is set in the variation pattern command. When CS1 = 197, 198 and CS2 = 0-120, “FF15” (premium reach PR1) is set in the variation pattern command. When CS1 = 197, 198 and CS2 = 121-240, “FF16” (premium reach PR2) is set in the variation pattern command.

  Further, when a negative determination is made in step S906, that is, in the case of “special probability variation”, a special probability variation pattern is determined in step S909 and set in the variation pattern command. Thereafter, in step S910, the chance symbol ("A6" in the present embodiment) is set as the symbol command, and the process proceeds to step S920. As described above, in the variation pattern command corresponding to “special probability variation”, “FF17” in the normal mode and “FE17” in the time reduction mode are set according to the gaming state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, if the state is a low probability state, in step S911, it is determined whether or not the first success / failure flag is on in consideration of the success / failure random number storage area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S911, that is, if it is determined that the winning lottery is won in the low probability state, the process proceeds to step S903, and processing for generating various jackpot states is performed.

  In this embodiment, when the big hit state occurs in the low probability state, it is only when the first success / failure flag is on, and even if the second success / failure flag is on in the low probability state. A jackpot state does not occur. Therefore, for example, in the high probability state, the value “8-16, 308-316” of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is won in the high probability state (a jackpot state occurs) but is not won in the low probability state is reserved for special fluctuation. In the case where the change display corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is executed in a low-probability state across the jackpot state, the case will be described below. The process proceeds to the process at the time of deviation (setting process of the fluctuation pattern command at the time of deviation).

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S911 or step S902, that is, if it is determined to be “out”, in step S912, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable holding area is considered, It is determined whether or not the front / rear flag is on. In the present embodiment, not only when it is determined that the corresponding fluctuation information is being stored at the time of holding storage (when the first or second flag is ON), but also stored in a high probability state, Although it is a winning in the probability state, it will be “out” if the low probability state is reached (the second winning / failing flag is turned on) because the type of reach is determined in advance in the start winning process. In the variation start process, it is not necessary to perform a reach determination process separately.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S912, that is, if the “rearward / rearward reach” is determined, a front / rear reach variation pattern is determined in step S913 and set in a variation pattern command. After that, in step S914, the back and forth symbols are set as symbol commands, and the process proceeds to step S920.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step 912, in step S915, the reach random number storage area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the other than front and rear flags are on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S915, that is, “reach other than front / rear detachment”, a reach variation pattern other than front / rear detachment is determined in step S916 and set in a variation pattern command. Thereafter, in step S917, symbols other than back and forth are set as symbol commands, and the process proceeds to step S920.

  If a negative determination is made in step S915, that is, if it is “completely out”, an outlier variation pattern is determined in step S918 and set in the variation pattern command. Thereafter, in step S919, the completely off symbol is set as a symbol command, and the process proceeds to step S920.

  It should be noted that when determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation in steps S913, S916, and S918, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. Is the same as step S904 and step S907.

  Here, the correspondence relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation type when the reach state occurs will be described. For example, at the time of front / rear detachment during the normal mode, the correspondence is defined by a table for front / rear detachment during the normal mode as shown in FIG. That is, when CS1 = 0 to 9, “FF11” (normal reach) is set in the variation pattern command regardless of the value of CS2. When CS1 = 10 to 198 and CS2 = 0 to 90, “FF12” (super reach SR1) is set in the variation pattern command. When CS1 = 10 to 198 and CS2 = 91 to 170, “FF13” (super reach SR2) is set in the variation pattern command. When CS1 = 10 to 198 and CS2 = 171 to 240, “FF14” (super reach SR3) is set in the variation pattern command. At the time of reach other than forward / backward deviation (C3 = 2 to 21), the reach is normal regardless of the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, and “FF11” is set in the variation pattern command. Further, at the time of complete deviation (C3 = 22 to 238), “FF10” is set in the variation pattern command regardless of the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2.

  Also, the symbol commands in step S914, step S917, and step S919 indicate the predetermined division of the combination of symbols that are out of the same manner as in step S905, step S908, and the like. Specifically, when “A3” indicating the combination of the front and rear off symbols is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 that has received the symbol command stores the front and rear stored in the front and rear outreach symbol buffer of the RAM 553. A combination of symbols corresponding to the detachment reach is determined as a stop symbol. When “A4” indicating a combination of symbols other than the front / rear detachment is set in the symbol command, the sub-control unit displays a combination of symbols corresponding to the reach other than the front / rear detachment stored in the reach symbol buffer of the RAM 553. 262 is determined as a stop symbol. When “A5” indicating a combination of completely disconnected symbols is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 uses the combination of symbols stored in the completely disconnected symbol buffer of the RAM 553 as a stop symbol. decide.

  In step S920, a start setting process is performed to indicate that a condition for performing switching display (variable display) is established in the special display devices 43L and 43R. In the start setting process, the first display flag indicating whether or not the variable display is being performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R is turned on, and the first display timer setting process is performed. The first display timer is a means for measuring the variation time (residual time for variation display) in the special display devices 43L and 43R, and is considered when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the beginning of the variation display. . In addition, the value corresponding to the variation pattern of the decorative design selected by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is set as the variation display time of the special display devices 43L and 43R in the present embodiment. Based on the setting of the first display timer, when a control signal for starting the switching display (variation display) is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the next external output process of the normal process. In the special display devices 43L and 43R, switching display (variation display) is started. The special display devices 43L and 43R are 7-segment display devices as described above. If the displayed character is “−”, it is “7”, if it is “7”, it is “3”, and if it is “3”. If “2” or “2”, “−” is displayed (“2” is not displayed for the second special display device 42R, and “−” is displayed if the displayed character is “3”. ) Perform switching display. Then, after step S920 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 18, if an affirmative determination is made in step S <b> 802, that is, if the variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S <b> 812 to perform a first display timer subtraction process. Each time this process is performed, the value of the first display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, when the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), “2500” is set for the first display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S813, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed with reference to the value of the first display timer after the subtraction. At this time, when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the first display timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S813.

  When a negative determination is made in step S813, in step S817, a switching display setting for continuously performing switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed, and this process is terminated. Based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for switching display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, if the currently displayed character is “−”, “7”, if “7” is “3”, “3” is “2”, and “2” is “−”. ("3" for the second special display device 43R is set to "-"). Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized at the timing of the first display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S813, the first display flag is canceled (turned off) in step S814, and stop display setting is performed in order to perform stop display on the special display devices 43L and 43R in step S815. . Based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R in the external output process in the next normal process. That is, “7” is stopped and displayed (for example, lighted for only a few seconds) when it is a promiscuous jackpot with transition to the probability variation mode, and “3” is displayed with a normal jackpot with transition to the time reduction mode. Stop display is made. When the special probability change is accompanied by the transition to the probability change mode, “2” is stopped and when it is off, “−” is stopped and displayed. Again, such a stop display by the special display devices 43L and 43R is the main display, and the display of the decorative symbols by the decorative symbol display device 42 is only auxiliary.

  Subsequently, after the discrimination information setting process is performed in step S816, the present process is terminated. Here, the discrimination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S1001, the success / failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable suspension area is taken into consideration to determine whether or not the stop display corresponds to the jackpot. Here, when it corresponds to jackpot, it transfers to step S1002 and performs jackpot setting. Specifically, setting processing such as a jackpot flag, a first variable flag, a first variable timer, a round number counter, and a winning counter is performed. And after completion | finish of step S1002, a discrimination | determination information setting process is complete | finished.

  The jackpot flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the jackpot state is a special gaming state, and here, “1” indicating the occurrence of the jackpot state is set (turned on) as a flag value. The value of the jackpot flag is determined based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1.

  The first variable flag is discrimination information for discriminating whether or not the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening) is in an open state.

  The first variable timer is a means for measuring the opening time or the like of the variable winning device 32, and is considered when determining whether or not a specified time has elapsed since the start of opening. In this example, “7500” is set as the value for the first variable timer. As a result, the maximum opening time per round (the longest time during which the variable winning device 32 is opened) is 30 seconds.

  The round number counter is discriminating information for discriminating the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of special prize occurrences, that is, the number of executions of the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 32). “15” shown is set as a value.

  The winning counter is means for counting the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32. In this process, “8” indicating the maximum number of winning balls per round is set as a value. In addition, in the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt process, it is determined whether or not there is a ball entering the variable winning device 32 based on the detection information of the count switch 223, and there is a ball entering the variable winning device 32. When determined, the value of the winning counter is decremented by 1.

  In this embodiment, in the case of “probable big hit” or “normal big hit”, as described above, “15” is set for the round number counter, “7500” is set for the first variable timer, and “8” is set for the winning counter. In the case of “special probability change”, “2” is set in the round number counter, “100” is set in the first variable timer, and “8” is set in the winning counter.

  If it is determined in step S1001 that the jackpot does not correspond, that is, it is determined that the game is out of place, the process proceeds to step S1003.

  In step S1003, it is determined whether or not a variation counter is set. The variation counter is a means for measuring the duration of the time-reduced state (how many variations are displayed). As will be described later, “100” is set as the counter value after the end of the normal jackpot.

  If the counter value of the variation counter is “0”, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the variation counter is set (when the counter value is other than “0”), it is regarded that the time reduction state is being set, and in step S1004, the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1. The process proceeds to step S1005.

  In step S1005, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the variation counter is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is the 100th variation display after the end of the normal jackpot (after the provision of the time reduction state). Here, if the value of the variation counter is “0”, a process of turning off a high-ball entering state flag, which will be described later, is performed in step S1006, and a process of turning off a time shortening state flag, which will be described later, is performed in step S1007. The process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1005 that the counter value of the variation counter is not “0”, the present process is terminated.

  Next, the variable winning device control process in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is on. If a negative determination is made here, this processing is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the first variable timer in step S1202. In a succeeding step S1203, it is determined whether or not the first variable flag is ON.

  If a positive determination is made in step S1203, that is, if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, the process proceeds to step S1204, whether or not the count value of the first variable timer is “0”, that is, one round. It is determined whether or not the open time of the winning variable winning device 32 remains.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1204, the process proceeds to step S1205, and whether or not the value of the winning counter is “0”, that is, the number of game balls won to the variable winning device 32 is per round. It is determined whether or not the prescribed number (eight in this example) has been reached. If a negative determination is made in step S1204, that is, if the timing for turning the variable prize-winning device 32 to the closed state (the timing of the end of the round) has not yet arrived, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1204 or step S1205, the process proceeds to step S1206, and whether or not the counter value of the round number counter is “0”, that is, the number of rounds (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is released). ) Has reached the specified number of times.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1206, an end setting process is performed in step S1207, and this process ends. In the end setting process of step S1207, the first variable flag and the jackpot flag are turned off, and the high probability state flag setting process, the time shortening state flag setting process, the high pitching state flag setting process, and the variation counter setting Processing is performed.

  The high probability state flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the game mode is a high probability state. In the high probability state flag setting process, the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable hold area On the basis of the flags (probability change flag, special accuracy flag) set to, the high probability state flag is switched and set. As a result, when the probability variation mode is set after the jackpot is ended (the probability variation flag or the special accuracy flag is on), “1” indicating the occurrence of a high probability state is set as the flag value, and the time reduction mode is set ( In the normal flag ON), “0” indicating the occurrence of the low probability state is set as the flag value.

  The time reduction state flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the game mode is a time reduction state. In the time reduction state flag setting process, “1” indicating that a time reduction state is generated is set. Set as a flag value.

  The high entry state flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the game mode is a high entry state, and indicates that the high entry state is generated in the high entry state flag setting process. “1” is set as the flag value.

  The variation counter is a means for measuring the duration of the time-reduced state (how many variations are displayed) as described above. In the variation counter setting process, the high probability state flag setting process and Similarly, based on the flag (normal flag) set in the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area, the change counter of the fluctuation number is set. As a result, when the time reduction mode is set (usually a big hit), “100” corresponding to 100 fluctuation displays is set as the value of the fluctuation counter.

  When the jackpot setting (step S1002) is performed in the discrimination information setting process of FIG. 20, the high probability state flag, the time shortening state flag, and the high pitching state flag (and the variation count counter) are reset once (" It may be configured such that “0” is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1206, that is, if the number of rounds has not reached the prescribed number, round feed processing is performed in step S1208, and this processing is terminated. In the round feed process, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round number counter. That is, the opening / closing process is repeated until the number of executed rounds reaches a predetermined number of times set in advance. In the round feed process, the first variable flag is turned off, and the time (wait time) until the next round is started is set for the first variable timer.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1203, that is, if the wait period between rounds is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1209 to determine whether or not the value of the first variable timer is “0”. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1209, that is, if the wait period ends and the timing for starting the next round is reached, a round start process is performed in step S1210. In the round start process, the first variable flag is turned on, the opening time (“7500” in this example) of the variable winning device 32 per round is set for the first variable timer, and the winning counter is set. The maximum number of winnings per round (in this example, “8”) is set. If a negative determination is made in step S1209, or if the round start process is completed in step S1210, this process ends. In the case of “special probability change”, “400” is set for the first variable timer.

  Various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the next external output process of the normal process based on the ON / OFF state of the first variable flag. When the first variable flag is ON, a control signal for opening the big prize opening is output to the variable winning device 32, and the variable winning device 32 is opened. On the other hand, when the first variable flag is OFF, a control signal for closing the big prize opening is output to the variable winning device 32, and the variable winning device 32 is closed.

  Next, the second display control process of step S207 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In FIG. 23, in step S2101, the normal symbol display device 41 is in the switching display (variable display) while looking at the setting state of the second display flag indicating whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is performing the variable display. It is determined whether or not there is. Specifically, when the second display flag is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display, and when the second display flag is off, the normal symbol display device 41 varies. It is considered that the stop display corresponding to the display stop state is in progress.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102, and it is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. At this time, if the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the variable display is not being performed and the value of the normal hold counter Nc> 0, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. In step S2104, a process for shifting the data stored in the normal variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the normally variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first hold area, the third hold area → the second hold area, the fourth hold area → the third hold area.

  Thereafter, in step S2105, start setting processing is executed. In this process, the normal symbol display device 41 performs a process indicating that a condition for performing switching display (variable display) is established. Specifically, the second display timer flag is turned on, and the second display timer setting process is performed. The second display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (residual time) of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41, and is used when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display. Is done. In the present embodiment, in the normal mode, since the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is 2 seconds, “500” is set in the second display timer. In the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, “100” is set in the second display timer. Based on the setting in the start setting process, when a control signal for starting the switching display (variation display) is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output process of the normal process, the normal symbol display is performed. Switching display is started in the device 41. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to light up and display “O” or “X” as an ordinary symbol. If the displayed symbol is “O”, “X”, “X” "Is switched to" ○ ". Then, after step S2105 ends, the second display control process ends.

  If the determination in step S2101 is affirmative, that is, if the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display, the process proceeds to step S2106 to perform a second display timer subtraction process. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the second display timer is decremented by one.

  In step S2107, it is determined whether or not the count value of the second display timer is “0”, that is, whether or not the variation time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the second display flag is turned off in step S2108, and normal symbol stop display setting for performing stop display on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2109. Then, based on the setting contents of the normal symbol stop display setting, a control signal to stop display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output processing in the normal processing. That is, in the case of winning, the “◯” symbol (winning symbol) is stopped (for example, lit only for a few seconds), and in the case of being off, the “x” symbol is stopped.

  As described above, it is determined whether or not the winning is made based on the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal variation holding area. Specifically, “5-153” is the winning value among the numerical values 0-250 of the normal symbol random number counter C4.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2110, a normal symbol discrimination information setting process is performed, and this process ends. In this process, when the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for performing the opening / closing process of the start winning unit 33 is performed. Specifically, the second variable flag is turned on, and the release time is set in the second variable timer.

  The second variable flag is determination information for determining whether or not the start winning unit 33 (opening / closing member 33c) is in an open state.

  The second variable timer is a means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the start winning unit 33, and is considered when determining whether or not a specified time has elapsed since the opening start. In the present embodiment, the opening time of the start winning unit 33 is different between the high pitching state (probability change mode and time reduction mode) and the low pitching state (normal mode). In the high pitching state, the second variable is possible. “1000” is set for the timer, and “100” is set for the second variable timer in the low pitching state.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2107, in step S2111 a switching display setting for continuously performing the switching display (variation display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed, and this process is terminated. Based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for performing switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, if the current lighting is “◯”, “×” is displayed, and if “×”, the display is switched to “◯”. Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

  Next, the opportunity handling unit control process in step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not a second variable flag indicating whether or not the start winning unit 33 (opening / closing member 33c) is in an open state is ON. Here, when it is determined that the second variable flag is not on (the start winning unit 33 is in the closed state), the present process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, that is, if the second variable flag is on, it is considered that the start winning unit 33 is in the open state, and a second variable timer subtraction process is performed in step S2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the second variable timer is decremented by one.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2203, and it is determined whether or not the specified opening time has elapsed by taking into account the value of the second variable timer after the subtraction. Here, when the specified opening time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the second variable timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S2203. If a negative determination is made here, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2204, and after an end setting process is performed in step S2204, this process ends. In the end setting process of step S2204, a process of turning off the second variable flag is performed.

  Various control signals are output to the start winning unit 33 in the next external output process of the normal process based on the ON / OFF state of the second variable flag. When the second variable flag is on, a control signal for opening the opening / closing member 33c is output to the start winning unit 33, and the start winning unit 33 is opened. On the other hand, when the second variable flag is OFF, a control signal for closing the opening / closing member 33c is output to the start winning unit 33, and the starting winning unit 33 is closed (the opening / closing member 33c is closed). , It is impossible to enter the game ball into the lower winning award 33b).

  Next, payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, the reception interrupt process will be described first with reference to FIG. 25, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process executed by the payout control apparatus 311. The reception interrupt process is a process executed by interruption when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, the other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is temporarily waited, and the reception interrupt process is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, the command transmitted from the main control device 261 in step S3001 is first stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is stored in step S3002. Turns on the command reception flag and ends this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referred to and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is stored in order to store the next received command in the next storage area. Is updated.

  In the present embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by the interrupt process executed when the command is received. For example, as illustrated in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it is confirmed whether or not a command is received. If a command is received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if no command is received, the process may proceed to command determination processing. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by confirming a port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at predetermined intervals.

  Next, main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control device 311. This main process is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

  First, in step S3101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. In step S3103, the RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

  Thereafter, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If the information on occurrence of power interruption is set in the backup area 513a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in step S3108, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. No, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 513. It should be noted that it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly stored.

  If no power-off occurrence information is set in step S3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by a RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) in step S3108, the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 513 after step S3115. Transition.

  In step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to permit interruption.

  On the other hand, on the condition that the power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106 and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal in step S3108, the process at the time of power recovery (at the time of power failure recovery) Process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, power-off occurrence information is cleared in step S3110, and a payout permission flag that permits payout of prize balls is cleared in step S3111. In step S3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized. In step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. In step S3114, an interrupt is permitted.

  After the interruption is permitted in step S3114, it is determined in the process of step S3122 whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the information on occurrence of power supply interruption is set, the power supply is cut off. Therefore, the processing after step S3123 is performed as a power failure process at the time of power supply interruption. In the power failure process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S3123, and a command determination process described later is executed in the next step S3124. Thereafter, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S3125, the stack pointer value is stored in the backup area 513a in step S3126, and the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3127 to calculate the backup area 513a. In step S3128, RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 513.

  Note that since the process of step S3122 confirms the occurrence information of the power-off after the process performed at the time of turning on the power, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than that in the middle of each process. Less and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

  Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and a determination process for the command is performed (step S3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating command determination processing performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps S3124 and S3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step S3301. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received in the above-described reception interrupt process (see FIG. 25).

  If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is OFF, a new command has not been received from the main control device 261, and thus this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing in steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

  The type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined in the processing of step S3304 to step S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command. In step S3305, it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command. In step S3306, it is determined whether the command is a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not.

  If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag has already been turned on. If the payout permission flag has been turned off, the main power is turned on. Since the initialization of the RAM 513 is instructed from the control device 261, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. Thereafter, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and the payout permission for the winning ball is set.

  As described above, the main controller 261 performs initialization processing of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes processing of the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially at the same time. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to a shift in the initialization timing, the RAM 513 is initialized, and control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. The occurrence of adverse effects can be prevented. In addition, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set the payout allowance for prize balls.

  On the other hand, if the payout permission flag has already been turned on in step S3307, the command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and the initialization process of the RAM 513. That is, the processing in step S3307 prohibits initialization of the RAM 513 with the payout permission flag set. The payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on. Therefore, the payout initialization command is not received in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized the payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value setting of the RAM 513 (step S3309) is executed in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on, the payout is not made when a prize ball remains. Although an adverse effect occurs and causes a loss to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent the player from being lost.

  Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cut-off. In order to permit the payout of the prize ball, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is information on occurrence of power interruption and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power interruption, the payout of the prize ball is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

  Further, if the command transmitted from main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the received prize ball number is added to the total prize ball number and stored in step S3310. In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads out the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. And remember. Since a prize ball corresponding to the number of prize balls is paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command for instructing the prize ball to be paid out. . In addition, when a winning ball command is received, the payout permission is immediately set, so that the winning ball can be paid out early for winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

  Note that the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is not a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), is not a payout return command (step S3305: NO), and is not a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process is terminated without turning on the payout permission flag.

  Returning to the flowchart of FIG. When the command determination process ends, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing is ended as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent award balls from being paid out before a command is transmitted from the main controller 261.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, the launch permission is set for the launch control device 312 in step S3203, the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204, and the state return operation is determined to be started. Perform a return operation. With this process, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, for example, when the payout motor is clogged, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state). .

  Thereafter, in step S3205, setting of the lower plate full state or the lower plate full state is performed according to the change in the state of the lower plate 15. That is, when the lower pan 15 is detected based on the detection signal of the lower pan full switch, when the lower pan is full, the lower pan full state is set, and when the lower pan full is not reached , Set the lower pan full release state. In step S3206, setting of a tank ball absence state (out of ball state) or a tank ball absence release state (ball state) is executed in accordance with a change in the state of the tank ball. In other words, the tank ball no switch state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch, and the special setting for the absence of the tank ball and the setting for the no tank ball state are executed. Perform configuration.

  Thereafter, in step S3207, for example, the presence / absence of a state to be notified, such as an error state, is determined.

  Subsequently, a payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, a payout number setting process is performed in step S3208, a motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3209, and a motor drive process is performed in step S3210.

  In step S3211, the state return switch 321 is checked to execute the ball removal process by driving the payout motor 358a on the condition that the ball removal disabled state is not set and the ball removal operation is not started. In a succeeding step S3212, the control of the vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the beginning of the timer interrupt process.

  Next, normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received.

  If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. When commands are stored in all storage areas, the ring buffer is at the start of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

  In a succeeding step S3903, a hold information storage process for storing the advance command in a hold information storage area provided in the RAM 553 is performed. Note that, as described above, the starting command indicates information indicating whether the winning winning opening 33a or the lower winning opening 33b is a variation display triggered by the ball, or whether it is variation information corresponding to the jackpot. Information, information indicating the type of jackpot, and information indicating the type of reach are included.

  The reserved information storage area includes the first reserved information storage area Md and the second reserved information storage area each having four reserved areas (the reserved first to fourth reserved areas), similarly to the special variable reserved area of the main controller 261. Me and one execution area are provided. In the first hold information storage area Md, in accordance with the reception history of the advance command based on the first change display (information stored in the first special change hold area), information about whether or not the big hit, type of the big win (winning Type) and variation information such as reach type are stored in time series. In the second hold information storage area Me, the change information is stored in time series in accordance with the reception history of the preceding command based on the second change display (information stored in the second special change hold area). . By adopting this configuration, there are four pieces of variable display information (variation information) triggered by entering the top winning opening 33a and four pieces of variable display information triggered by entering the bottom winning opening 33b. As a result, the sub-control device 262 can grasp the fluctuation information stored in the first and second special fluctuation hold areas of the main control device 261.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there may be a case where an effect display related to each other in a plurality of continuous variable displays is intentionally derived (so-called continuous notice is performed). In the present embodiment, as a continuous production random number generating means for deciding whether or not to perform a continuous advance notice (continuous production lottery) in the hold information storage processing for storing the advance command in the hold information storage area (Md, Me). The value of the continuous notice counter and the value of the notice type counter as continuous production type random number generating means for determining the mode (type) of the continuous notice are obtained.

  The continuous notice counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 49, for example, and reaches the upper limit (that is, 49) and then returns to 0 that is the lower limit. The continuous notice counter is periodically updated (for example, the value of the continuous notice counter is also updated in the counter update process in step S3905 described later), and the value of the continuous notice counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous notice counter buffer). Is done.

  The notice type counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 9, for example, and reaches the upper limit (that is, 9) and then returns to 0 that is the lower limit. The notice type counter is periodically updated (for example, a process for updating the value of the notice type counter is performed after the counter update process in step S3905 described later), and the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (the notice type counter buffer). Is stored.

  In the hold information storage process, when fluctuation information is stored in the hold information storage area (Md, Me), the values of the continuous notice counter and the notice type counter stored in the continuous notice counter buffer and the notice type counter buffer are stored. Will be acquired. Further, each of the holding area and the execution area of the holding information storage area is provided with a continuous notice flag that is turned on when it is determined that a continuous notice is to be derived.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a notice / notice determination table as a continuous effect winning value storage means that is taken into consideration when determining whether or not to make a continuous notice to the ROM 552, and a continuous effect that is taken into consideration when determining the mode of continuous notice. A notice table as a type determination value storage means is provided. A plurality of advance notice determination tables and advance notice tables are provided, and the advance notice determination table and the advance notice table to be considered are selected according to the variation information.

  Hereinafter, the hold information storage process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not a starting command has been received (whether or not the starting command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S 4101, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, it is determined in step S4102 whether or not the starting command corresponds to a ball entering the lower winning opening 33b (variation information stored in the second special variation holding area). Is determined. If a negative determination is made here, that is, if the starting command corresponds to a ball entering the top winning opening 33a (variation information stored in the first special variation holding area), in step S4103, the first command The up-floating hold counter Nd, which counts the number of pieces of change information held in the hold information storage area Md, is incremented by one.

  In subsequent step S4104, information on whether or not the jackpot is included in the advance command, information on the jackpot type, information on the reach type, and the like are stored in the first of the free holding areas in the first holding information storage area Md. .

  In subsequent step S4105, the value of the continuous notice counter and the notice type counter are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the reserved area in which the fluctuation information is newly stored in step S4104 in the first reserved information storage area Md. Remember.

  After step S4105, in step S4106, one of the first hold lamps 46L in the extinguished state (for example, the leftmost lamp 46L that is extinguished) is turned on. In a succeeding step S4107, a first continuous notice setting process for determining whether or not to execute a continuous notice is performed, and then this process is terminated. Details of the first continuous notice setting process will be described later.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4102, that is, if the starting command corresponds to a ball entering the lower winning opening 33b (variation information stored in the second special variation holding area), step Proceeding to S4108, the lower fluctuation hold counter Ne that counts the number of fluctuation information held in the second hold information storage area Me is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S4109, information on whether or not the jackpot is included in the advance command, information on the jackpot type, information on the reach type, and the like are stored in the first of the vacant holding areas in the second holding information storage area Me. .

  In the subsequent step S4110, the value of the continuous notice counter and the notice type counter are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the reserved area in the second reserved information storage area Me in which the fluctuation information is newly stored in step S4109. Remember.

  After step S4110, in step S4111, one of the second hold lamps 46R in the extinguished state (for example, the leftmost lamp 46R that is extinguished) is turned on. In a succeeding step S4112, a second continuous notice setting process for determining whether or not to execute a continuous notice is performed, and then this process is terminated. The details of the second continuous notice setting process will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, the special effect determination process is configured by the processes of step S4105 and step S4110 and the continuous notice setting process of step S4107 and step S4112 (step S4105 and step S4107 are the first special effect determination process). Step S4110 and Step S4112 are second special effect determination processing). The processes in steps S4105 and S4110 constitute a continuous effect determination value extraction process and a continuous effect information storage process. Steps S4401 to S4410 and steps S4501 to S4509 correspond to the continuous effect determination processing. Step S4411, step S4510 to step S4518 constitute a continuous effect result storage process.

  Next, the second continuous notice setting process in step S4112 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the second continuous notice setting process, it is confirmed that the advance command has been received (step S4101: YES), and the advance command corresponds to entering the lower winning award 33b (step S4102). : YES).

  First, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not the value of the downward fluctuation holding counter Ne is “2” or more. If a negative determination is made in step S4401, the process is terminated as it is. That is, when two or more second variation displays are not stored on hold, the continuous notice is not performed.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4401, the change information newly stored in the second hold information storage area Me in step S4402 corresponds to the jackpot (in the main controller 261, the first or first 2) is determined whether or not the winning / notifying flag corresponds to the variation information set to ON. If the determination in step S4402 is affirmative, in step S4403, the variation information newly stored in the second hold information storage area Me corresponds to “probability variation big hit” (in the main control device 261, the probability variation flag). Is the information corresponding to the fluctuation information set to ON).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4403, that is, if the fluctuation information corresponds to “probability big hit”, in step S4404, the corresponding advance notice determination table is referred to and newly added to the second hold information storage area Me. It is determined whether or not the value of the stored continuous notice counter matches one of “1 to 40”. If a negative determination is made in step S4404, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S4404, the process proceeds to step S4411. In step S4411, the continuous notice flag of all the holding areas in which the fluctuation information is stored among the holding areas of the second holding information storage area Me is turned on. However, the continuous notice flag in the execution area is not turned on. After the step S4411, the process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4403, that is, if the fluctuation information corresponds to “normal jackpot”, in step S4405, the corresponding advance notice determination table is referred to and a new information is added to the second hold information storage area Me. It is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice counter stored in (1) matches any of “1-30”. If a negative determination is made in step S4405, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4405, the flow proceeds to step S4411.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4402, it is determined in step S4406 whether or not the variation information newly stored in the second hold information storage area Me corresponds to the back and forth reach. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4406, the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the second hold information storage area Me in any one of “1 to 20” is taken into consideration in the corresponding notice determination table in step S4407. It is determined whether or not they match. If a negative determination is made in step S4407, the present process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to step S4411.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4406, it is determined in step S4408 whether or not the variation information newly stored in the second hold information storage area Me corresponds to reach other than forward / backward deviation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4408, in step S4409, the corresponding advance notice determination table is referred to and it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice counter matches any of “1-5”. If a negative determination is made in step S4409, the present process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to step S4411.

  Also, if a negative determination is made in step S4408, that is, if the variation information newly stored in the second hold information storage area Me corresponds to a complete detachment, in step S4410, the corresponding advance notice determination is made. Considering the table, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice counter matches “1”. If a negative determination is made in step S4410, the present process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to step S4411.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a variable display in which a big hit state occurs (stopped display with a combination of jackpot symbols) is performed, a continuous notice is executed with a probability of 80%, and a fluctuation that results in a back and forth reach is achieved. When a display is performed, a continuous notice is executed with a probability of 40%, and when a variable display that is a reach other than forward / backward is performed, a continuous notice is executed with a probability of 10%, and the fluctuation is completely off. When the display is performed, the continuous notice is executed with a probability of 2%.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the second continuous notice setting process that is performed when the variation information corresponding to the second variation display is stored on hold, the second variation display that is newly stored on hold is included in the second variation display. When two or more two-variable displays are stored on hold, a continuous notice may be set, and the continuous notice is set only for the second variable display stored on hold. That is, as described above, the second variation display is preferentially digested over the first variation display, so that the first variation display (which is likely to be completely out of order) that has already been stored is continuously notified. Even if set, since the first variation display is performed after the second variation display that has been newly stored, the effect is directed toward the last variation display among the plurality of variation displays for which continuous notice is performed. Contrary to the significance of continuous notice, such as enlivening. Therefore, it is desirable that the continuous advance notice, which is triggered by the fact that the variation information corresponding to the second variation display is stored on hold, is performed only by the second variation display stored on hold.

  Next, the first continuous notice setting process in step S4107 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that, as described above, in the first continuous notice setting process, reception of the advance command is confirmed (step S4101: YES), and the advance command corresponds to entering the top winning opening 33a (step S4102). : NO)).

  First, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not a value obtained by adding the value of the up fluctuation holding counter Nd and the value of the down fluctuation holding counter Ne is “2” or more. If a negative determination is made in step S4501, this processing is terminated as it is. That is, when two or more first variation display and second variation display are not stored on hold, the continuous notice is not performed.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4501, the change information newly stored in the first hold information storage area Md in step S4502 corresponds to the jackpot (in the main controller 261, the first or first 2) is determined whether or not the winning / notifying flag corresponds to the variation information set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4402, the variation information newly stored in the first hold information storage area Md in step S4503 corresponds to the “special probability variation” (in the main controller 261, the particular accuracy is determined. It is determined whether or not the flag corresponds to the variation information set on.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4503, that is, if the variation information corresponds to “special probability variation”, the process proceeds to step S4506 described later. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4503, that is, if the variation information corresponds to “probable big success” or “normal big success”, in step S4504, the corresponding advance notice determination table is referred to, and the first hold information It is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the storage area Md matches any of “1-40”. If a negative determination is made in step S4504, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S4504, the process proceeds to step S4510.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4502, it is determined in step S4505 whether or not the variation information newly stored in the first hold information storage area Md corresponds to the back and forth reach. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4505, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S4503, the corresponding advance notice determination table is referred to in step S4506 and newly stored in the first hold information storage area Md. It is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice counter matches any of “1 to 20”. If a negative determination is made in step S4506, the present process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to step S4510.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4505, it is determined in step S4507 whether or not the variation information newly stored in the first hold information storage area Md corresponds to reach other than forward / backward deviation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4507, it is determined in step S4508 whether or not the value of the continuous notice counter matches any of “1 to 5” by referring to the corresponding notice determination table. If a negative determination is made in step S4508, the present process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to step S4510.

  Also, if a negative determination is made in step S4507, that is, if the variation information newly stored in the first hold information storage area Md corresponds to a complete detachment, in step S4509, the corresponding advance notice determination is made. Considering the table, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice counter matches “1”. If a negative determination is made in step S4509, the present process is terminated as is. If an affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to step S4510.

  In step S4510, it is determined whether or not a value obtained by adding the value of the upward fluctuation hold counter Nd and the value of the downward fluctuation hold counter Ne is “4” or less. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4510, in step S4511, the continuous notice flag is turned on for all of the reserved areas in which variable information is stored among the reserved areas of the first and second reserved information storage areas Md and Me. To. After the step S4511, this process is terminated. Note that the continuous notice flag in the execution area is not turned on.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4510, it is determined in step S4512 whether or not the value of the upward fluctuation hold counter Nd is “4”. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4512, in step S4513, after turning on the continuous notice flags of all the reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas) in the first reserved information storage area Md, this process is terminated. .

  If a negative determination is made in step S4512, it is determined in step S4514 whether or not the value of the upward fluctuation hold counter Nd is “3”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4514, in step S4515, continuous notice flags of all the reserved areas (first to third reserved areas) in which the variation information is stored in the first reserved information storage area Md, and After turning on the continuous notice flag of the reserved area to be executed last (the variable display based on the stored variable information) among the reserved areas in which the variable information of the second reserved information storage area Me is stored This process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4514, it is determined in step S4516 whether or not the value of the up fluctuation hold counter Nd is “2”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4516, in step S4517, continuous notice flags of all the reserved areas (first and second reserved areas) in which the variation information is stored in the first reserved information storage area Md, and After turning on the continuous notice flag of the reserved area that will be executed second and last from among the reserved areas in which the variation information of the second reserved information storage area Me is stored, this process ends. .

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4516, that is, only the newly stored variation information is stored in the holding area of the first holding information storage area Md, the first holding is performed in step S4518. Among the information storage area Md, the continuous notice flag of all the reserved areas (first reserved area) where the variable information is stored, and among the reserved areas where the variable information of the second reserved information storage area Me is stored, Finally, after turning on the continuous notice flag of the reserved area that will be executed second and third from the end, this process ends.

  In this embodiment, it is determined that the continuous notice is executed when the process proceeds to step S4510. However, the number of variable displays for which the continuous notice is executed is determined by the processes in steps S4510 to S4518. Limited. That is, when the value obtained by adding the value of the upper fluctuation holding counter Nd and the value of the lower fluctuation holding counter Ne is larger than “4” (more than five of the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display are held and stored. Even if the continuous notice flag is turned on, the total number of reserved areas is four. Therefore, in this embodiment, a series of continuous notices are basically performed over a maximum of four variable displays. Incidentally, if it is determined that the continuous notice is to be executed separately in response to the fluctuation display stored on hold immediately thereafter, the continuous notice may be derived over four or more consecutive fluctuation displays.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 29, after step S3903 or when a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (1 msec in this example) has elapsed. If the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3905. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal process, the process proceeds to step S3912.

  In step S3905, various counter update processes are executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying decorative symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, the upper, middle, and lower symbols used for setting the off-set symbols of the big symbol decoration symbol counter C5, the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area. Each off symbol counter CL, CM, CR is used. The off symbol counters CL, CM, CR are configured such that register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly.

  The jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 determines a symbol (big jackpot symbol) when the decorative symbol display device 42 stops changing when the jackpot (probable big hit, normal jackpot). In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device In 42, the decorative symbols are set to five patterns of probability variation and five patterns of normal. Accordingly, five (0 to 4) counter values are prepared as the big hit decoration symbol counter C5. That is, the jackpot decoration symbol counter C5 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 4, and reaches 0 to the upper limit value (that is, 4). When the symbol command transmitted from the main control device 261 is “A1” indicating a combination of probability variation symbols, for example, based on a table (a table that associates counter values with decorative symbols), the counter value is If it is 0, it is “1”. ) If it is 4, the combination of probability variation symbols is determined in such a manner as “9” (the flat eye). When the symbol command is “A2” indicating a combination of normal symbols, for example, if the counter value is 0, “0” (based on a table (not shown) that associates the counter value with the decorative symbol) ( 1) “2” (for the doublet), 2 for “4” (for the doublet), 3 for “6” (for the doublet), 4 for “8” ”(The doublet) and the normal symbol combination is determined. The jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 is periodically updated in the counter update process of step S3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-control device 262 receives the symbol command as will be described later. In this embodiment, the jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 is stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but is not stored in the buffer, and the counter value is referred to at the timing of receiving the symbol command. It may be.

  The upper, middle, and lower off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the stop symbols (combinations of off symbols) in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the big hit lottery is missed. Yes, each of the 10 decorative symbols is displayed in each column, so 10 counter values (0 to 9) are prepared for each. The stop symbol in the upper symbol display area is determined by the up / down symbol counter CL, the stop symbol in the middle symbol display area is determined by the middle / off symbol counter CM, and the stop symbol in the lower symbol display area is determined by the bottom / off symbol counter CR. Is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when each outlier symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 10 is subtracted to determine the current value. The Each outlier symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of these outlier symbol counters CL, CM, CR is the front / rear outreach symbol buffer of RAM 553, the reach symbol buffer other than front / rear out, and It is stored in one of the completely off symbol buffers.

  Here, the update process of each off symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 31, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the up / down symbol counter CL. In step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the center / out symbol symbol CM. The upper, middle, and lower outlier counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be sequentially updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the down / out symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4001. If the up / down symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4002. If it is time to update the up / down symbol counter CL (YES in step S4001), the flow advances to step S4003 to update the up / down symbol counter CL. If it is the time to update the middle / outgoing symbol counter CM (YES in step S4002), the process proceeds to step S4004 to update the middle / outlier symbol counter CM. Further, if it is time to update the down / out symbol counter CR (both steps S4001 and S4002 are NO), the process proceeds to step S4005, and the down / out symbol counter CR is updated. In updating the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the lower 3 bits of the R register are added to the previous counter value, and 10 is subtracted when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value. The calculation result is set as the current value of the off symbol counters CL, CM, CR.

  According to the above-described CL, CM, and CR update processing, the up, middle, and lower outlier counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update processing, and the update times of the counter values overlap. There is nothing. As a result, every time the update process is executed three times, the set symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated for one set.

  Thereafter, in step S4006, the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, CR is a combination of reach symbols (the symbols in the upper symbol display area and the symbols in the lower symbol display area are the same, and the upper and lower symbol display areas And the symbol in the middle symbol display area are different from each other), and in the case of a combination of reach symbols (S4006 is YES), in step S4007, it is a back-and-forth outreach. It is determined whether or not there is. If the out symbol counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of front / rear out of reach (front / rear out symbol) (YES in S4007), the process proceeds to step S4008, and the combination of the out symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is stored in the RAM 553. Is stored in the front / rear reach reach symbol buffer. If the out symbol counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of reach other than front / rear disengagement (design other than front / back disengagement) (NO in S4007), the process proceeds to step S4009, and the out symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time The combination is stored in the reach symbol buffer other than the front and rear deviation of the RAM 553.

  If the combination is other than the reach symbol (NO in S4006), the process proceeds to step S4010 to determine whether or not the combination of the symbol symbols CL, CM, and CR is out of the combination, and the symbol is separated. If it is a combination of symbols (completely deviated symbols) (YES in S4010), the process proceeds to step S4011, and the combination of deviated symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is stored in the completely deviated symbol buffer of the RAM 553. If NO in both steps S4006 and S4010, the symbols are aligned at the top, middle, and bottom, that is, it corresponds to a combination of jackpot symbols. In this case, the off symbol counters CL, CM, CR are used as buffers. This process is terminated without storing.

  Note that the chance symbol that is stopped and displayed in the case of “special probability change” is one pattern (“3”, “4”, “1”) for the combination of decorative symbols, so the counter information is displayed when displaying the decorative symbols. There is no need to use it.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 29, a hold process is performed in step S3906. Hereinafter, the hold process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command is received (whether or not the variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S4201, the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4201, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not the value of the downward fluctuation hold counter Ne is greater than “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S4202, that is, if the fluctuation information of the second fluctuation display is not stored, the process proceeds to step S4203, and the value of the upper fluctuation holding counter Nd is decremented by one.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the second variation display is preferentially digested over the first variation display, and when the second variation display is stored on hold, the first variation display is digested. Never happen. That is, when the variation information of the second variation display is suspended and stored in the second suspension information storage area Me, the variation pattern command corresponding to the first variation display is not sent. For this reason, in this embodiment, in step S4202, it is determined whether or not the value of the downward fluctuation hold counter Ne is larger than “0”, so that the fluctuation pattern command is displayed in the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display. Which variation information is included is determined. Of course, the variation pattern command is provided with information indicating which variation information of the first variation display or the second variation display is supported, and based on the variation pattern command, the variation pattern command is displayed in the first variation display and It may be determined which variation information of the second variation display is included.

  After step S4203, in step S4204, a process of shifting data stored in the first hold information storage area Md is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data (including the continuous notice flag) stored in the hold first to fourth areas of the first hold information storage area Md to the execution area side. Data in each area is shifted, such as area → execution area, hold second area → hold first area, hold third area → hold second area, hold fourth area → hold third area.

  In the following step S4205, one of the first hold lamps 46L that are lit (for example, the rightmost lamp 46L that is lit) is turned off. After step S4205, the process proceeds to step S4209.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4202, that is, if even one piece of variation information of the second variation display is retained, in step S4206, 1 is subtracted from the value of the lower variation suspension counter Ne.

  In a succeeding step S4207, a process for shifting the data stored in the second hold information storage area Me is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold first to fourth areas of the second hold information storage area Me to the execution area side. Data in each area is shifted, such as 2 area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area. In the present embodiment, there is one execution area for the hold information storage area, and the data stored in the first hold information storage area and the second hold information storage area is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the data. Will be shifted to a common execution area.

  In the subsequent step S4208, one of the second holding lamps 46R that are in the lit state (for example, the rightmost lamp among the lit lamps 46L) is turned off. After step S4208, the process proceeds to step S4209.

  In step S4209, a notice type setting process for determining the type of display effect used for continuous notice is performed. After the step S4209, this process is terminated. In the present embodiment, the processes in steps S4203 and S4206 correspond to the sub-side shift process.

  Hereinafter, the notice type setting process in step S4209 will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the notice type setting process in step S3906 corresponds to the specific effect setting process.

  In the present embodiment, as a notice effect provided in the decorative symbol display device 42, a display effect in which small bubbles (hereinafter referred to as small bubbles) are generated from the lower part of the display unit of the decorative symbol display device 42 during the variable display, In some cases, a display effect in which larger bubbles (hereinafter referred to as “medium bubbles”) and a display effect in which a school of fish (hereinafter referred to as “fish school”) passes through the display unit may be derived. Specifically, the “small bubble” may be derived when the symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area of the decorative symbol display device 42. The “medium bubble” and “fish school” are displayed when the same symbol as the symbol stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area is stopped in the lower symbol display area after the “small bubble” is derived (the reach state is It may be derived (when it occurs). In the present embodiment, these display effects (“small bubbles”, “medium bubbles”, and “fish school”) are used as the continuous notice, and when the continuous notice is executed, these display effects are repeated a plurality of times. Are respectively derived in the fluctuation display.

  In the present embodiment, the ratio of selecting each display effect is different depending on the type of combination of decorative symbols. That is, a plurality of notice tables are provided which are referred to when determining the type of display effect used for continuous notice. Note that these display effects (bubbles or fish school) may be derived even during normal fluctuation display without continuous notice.

  First, in step S4801, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag in the execution area of the hold information storage area is on. If a negative determination is made in step S4801, no continuous advance notice is made, so this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4801, it is determined in step S4802 whether or not a big hit state occurs based on the variation information of the variation pattern command.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the time when the change display is stored on hold, a start command including change information such as whether or not the player is elected is output to the sub-control device 262, and the change information of the start command is displayed. It is the structure stored in the hold information storage area. For this reason, if the state when the variable display is stored on hold (high probability state / low probability state) and the state when the variable display is executed are different, is it a big hit stored in the hold information storage area? There is a case where the information of “no” is different from the variation pattern command. Specifically, the fluctuation information stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the main control device 261 is the big hit state when the fluctuation display corresponding to the fluctuation information is executed with the big hit state (after the big hit state). Although it was determined that it will correspond to the winning before, it may be determined that it does not correspond to the winning after the jackpot state, or it was determined that it will not correspond to the winning before the jackpot state, but it will be won after the jackpot state It may be determined that it corresponds. Of course, the change pattern command has, as information, the final (accurate) result of lottery according to the state at the time of starting the change display. For this reason, in step S4802, it is determined whether or not a big hit state occurs based not on the fluctuation information stored in the execution area of the hold information storage area but on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4802, it is determined in step S4803 whether or not it is "probable big hit" based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4803, in step S4804, the notice table A shown in FIG. 37A is referred to determine a continuous notice pattern (configuration effect type decision process), and the decided pattern is determined. In detail, it sets to the display command mentioned later (structure | production effect setting process). Specifically, when the value of the notice type counter in the execution area of the hold information storage area is “0”, the “small bubble” is displayed when the symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area of the decorative symbol display device 42. The display command is set so that “ When the value of the notice type counter is “1 to 4”, “small bubble” is derived when the symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area, and the symbol is displayed in the lower symbol display area. The display command is set so that “medium bubble” is derived when the stop is displayed. Further, when the value of the continuous notice type counter is “5 to 9”, “small bubble” is derived when the symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area, and the symbol is displayed in the lower symbol display area. A display command is set so that “fish school” is derived when is stopped and displayed. After step S4804, this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4803, it is determined in step S4805 whether or not it is a “normal jackpot” based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4805, in step S4806, the notice table B shown in FIG. 37B is referred to determine a continuous notice pattern, and the decided pattern is set as a display command. Specifically, when the value of the notice type counter in the execution area of the hold information storage area is “0, 1”, when the symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area of the decorative symbol display device 42, The display command is set so that “small bubbles” are derived. When the value of the notice type counter is “2 to 5”, “small bubble” is derived when the symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area, and the symbol is displayed in the lower symbol display area. The display command is set so that “medium bubble” is derived when the stop is displayed. Further, when the value of the continuous notice type counter is “6 to 9”, “small bubble” is derived when the symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area, and the symbol is displayed in the lower symbol display area. A display command is set so that “fish school” is derived when is stopped and displayed. After step S4806, this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4805, that is, “special probability change”, in step S4807, a continuous notice pattern is determined and the determined pattern is set as a display command. Specifically, in the case of “special probability change”, since the reach state does not occur, in step S4807, when the symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area of the decorative symbol display device 42, “small” is displayed. Set the display command so that "bubble" is derived. After step S4807, this process ends.

  Also, if a negative determination is made in step S4802, it is determined in step S4808 whether or not “front / rear out of reach” is based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command. If the determination in step S4808 is affirmative, in step S4809, the notice table C shown in FIG. 37C is referred to determine a continuous notice pattern, and the decided pattern is set as a display command. Specifically, when the value of the notice type counter in the execution area of the holding information storage area is “0 to 4”, when the symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area of the decorative symbol display device 42, The display command is set so that “small bubbles” are derived. When the value of the notice type counter is “5 to 8”, “small bubble” is derived when the symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area, and the symbol is displayed in the lower symbol display area. The display command is set so that “medium bubble” is derived when the stop is displayed. Further, when the value of the continuous notice type counter is “9”, “small bubble” is derived when the symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area, and the symbol is stopped in the lower symbol display area. A display command is set so that “fish school” is derived at the time of display. After step S4809, this process ends.

  Also, if a negative determination is made in step S4808, it is determined in step S4810 whether or not “reach other than front / back deviation” based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4810, in step S4811, a continuous notice pattern is determined in consideration of the notice table D shown in FIG. 37D, and the decided pattern is set as a display command. Specifically, when the value of the notice type counter in the execution area of the hold information storage area is “0 to 7”, when the symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area of the decorative symbol display device 42, The display command is set so that “small bubbles” are derived. When the notice type counter value is “8, 9”, “small bubble” is derived when the symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area, and the symbol is displayed in the lower symbol display area. The display command is set so that “medium bubble” is derived when the stop is displayed. After step S4811, this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4810, that is, “completely out”, in step S4812, a continuous notice pattern is determined and the determined pattern is set as a display command. Specifically, since the reach state does not occur in the case of “completely off”, in step S4812, when the symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area of the decorative symbol display device 42, “small” is displayed. Set the display command so that "bubble" is derived. After step S4812, this process ends.

  In the present embodiment, since the second variation display is preferentially digested over the first variation display, such a first variation is performed when continuous notice is given for a plurality of first variation displays. If there is a ball entering the lower prize opening 33b during the display variation display, the second variation display may interrupt between the plurality of first variation displays, and the continuous notice may be interrupted. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the display effect that can be derived even during normal fluctuation display when the continuous notice is not performed is used as the effect (bubbles or fish school) used as the continuous notice. For this reason, even if the continuous notice is interrupted, there is no sense of incongruity.

  In addition, in the above situation, a continuous notice may be additionally set for the second variable display that has been interrupted later (the continuous notice is increased by one time). However, in this case, for example, if a game ball continuously enters the lower winning opening 33b in the probability variation mode, the continuous notice will continue and there is a possibility that the interest will be lowered. It is better not to set.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 29, display setting processing is performed in step S3907. Here, based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various arithmetic processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output setting are performed. Accordingly, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined here, and a value corresponding to the variation time of the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer. At this time, the sub-control device 262 performs processing based on a table that associates the variation types of the decorative symbols with the variation pattern commands. In step S3907, the presence / absence of the operation of the effect button 125 is also checked. When the operation of the effect button 125 is confirmed, settings corresponding to this are performed. In the present embodiment, the display setting process in step S3907 corresponds to the fluctuation creation process.

  The display command is, for example, a command for designating a series of display effects from the start to the end of variable display, or a command for designating a display effect during a jackpot, based on information stored in the command buffer. Each time a necessary display command is generated. Usually, the display commands related to the variable display generated by the sub-control device 262 are roughly divided into a normal variable data group, a reach effect data group, and the like. Basically, each data constituting these data groups is the variable time timer. Are sequentially output in accordance with a predetermined time order, thereby providing display effects according to various variation patterns. For example, the normal fluctuation data group includes normal fluctuation data 1, normal fluctuation data 2,..., And normal fluctuation data m, and the reach effect data group includes reach effect data 1, reach effect data 2,. In the case of n, data output is sequentially performed in the order of normal fluctuation data 1 → 2 →... → m with the start of normal fluctuation, and subsequently reach effect data 1 → 2 → with the start of reach effect. ... → Data is sequentially output in the order of n.

  In the display setting process in step S3907, the stop symbol is also determined based on the symbol command. As described above, when “A1” is set in the symbol command, any combination of symbols 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 is determined as a stop symbol. On the other hand, when “A2” is set in the symbol command, a combination of symbols 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8 is determined as a stop symbol. When “A3” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the front / rear reach reach symbol buffer (see FIG. 30) of the RAM 553 is determined as a stop symbol. When “A4” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front / rear deviation is determined as a stop symbol. When “A5” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the completely off symbol buffer is determined as a stop symbol. When “A6” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols “3”, “4”, and “1” corresponding to the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas of the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped. Determine as.

  Note that the display control device 45 performs a drawing process in response to a command from the sub-control device 262, and starts a variable display of symbols on the decorative symbol display device. Once the variation pattern command is received from main controller 261, sub-control is performed until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed (until the variation time timer set in step S3907 becomes 0). Under the cooperation of the device 262 and the display control device 45, the variable display of symbols is continued.

  In the lamp setting process in step S3908, the lighting pattern of the lamp / electrical accessories is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In the sound setting process in step S3909, the output pattern of the speaker 24 is set to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. In addition, when a voice-related command such as an error notification is transmitted from the main control device 261, settings for performing these controls are also performed in step S3909.

  In step S3910, other processing such as control setting of a waiting-for-waiting effect (for example, a demonstration screen display set to be displayed when a predetermined time elapses without the decorative symbol display device 42 being changed) is performed. Do.

  In step 3911, an external output process for transmitting a control signal based on the setting contents in steps S3905 to 3910 to each device is executed. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol.

  After the processing of steps S3905 to S3911 performed every 1 msec is performed, or when a negative determination is made in step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3912, and whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 553 is determined. Is determined. The information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored when a power interruption command is received from the main controller 261.

  If the occurrence information of the power interruption is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3913, and it is determined whether or not the RAM 553 is destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3912 that the power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step S3914. In power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

  As described above in detail, according to the present embodiment, the main control device 261 has the change information of the change display performed when the player enters the top winning opening 33a (detected by the first start winning switch 224a). It is possible to memorize variation information of a variation display that is performed when triggered by a first special variation reservation area having four storage areas that can be stored and a ball entering the lower winning opening 33b (detection by the second start winning switch 224b) 4 A special variable reserved area is provided as a reserved storage area including a second special variable reserved area having one reserved area and one execution area. That is, since the variation information related to the setting of the variation display such as the value of the big hit random number counter C1 can be stored a plurality of times, the variation display teaching the result of the lottery is consequently suspended.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it is the structure by which the continuous notice as a specific production over the continuous fluctuation display of multiple times is performed, and is the said continuous notice performed based on the fluctuation information memorize | stored in the special fluctuation holding area? No is determined. For this reason, when the variable display is suspended, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to “big jackpot” (winning in the winning lottery), and the result of the determination, etc. The starting command including the fluctuation information is output to the sub-control device 262 that performs processing related to “continuous notice”. It should be noted that by performing processing related to “continuous notice” in the sub-control device 262, the control burden on the main control device 261 can be reduced.

  Further, the sub-control device 262 includes a first holding information storage area Md having four holding areas capable of storing variable information of variable display performed when a ball enters the top winning opening 33a, and a lower winning opening 33b. There is provided a hold information storage area including a second hold information storage area Me having four hold areas capable of storing change information of a change display performed upon entering the ball, and one execution area. Then, the fluctuation information of the starting command output from the main control device 261 is stored in the corresponding holding area of the holding information storage area. In this way, by providing a holding information storage area similar to the special variable holding area of the main control device 261 in the sub control device 261, the sub control device 261 can reliably grasp the change display held. In addition, a continuous notice (specific effect) can be reliably set for the variable display that is on hold.

  Moreover, it is necessary to perform the mode of the variable display based on the result of the lottery. That is, as in this embodiment, when there are a plurality of game modes (high probability state, low probability state) with different winning probabilities, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 and the like are stored in the special variation holding area. The game mode may be different between the first timing and the second timing at which the variation display based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the special variation suspension area is started. For this reason, a situation may occur in which the determination result of whether or not the jackpot determination process performed at the first timing is inaccurate at the second timing. Specifically, for example, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 extracted in the start winning process (steps S504 and S512) corresponds to a loss at the first timing but corresponds to a win at the second timing. In some cases, there is a case where the first timing corresponds to winning, but the second timing corresponds to a loss. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when setting the variable display (at the second timing when the variable display is started), the result of the lottery determination or the like is determined again so that the big hit state should be originally given (although ), The right cannot be obtained (becomes missed), or the jackpot is not granted (although it is missed), the right has been obtained (becomes a win) The situation is such that an accurate determination is made that is suitable for the game mode at the second timing.

  In the present embodiment, when setting the variable display, it is not determined again whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 matches the value stored in the success / failure determination table, but the top winning opening 33a, the bottom winning prize The result of the jackpot determination process (first hit determination process) already performed at the time when the game ball enters the mouth 33b and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the holding area of the special fluctuation holding area (the first hit determination process) Based on the third to third success / failure flag), the result of the success / failure lottery is determined (the second success / failure determination process is performed), and the variable display is set (see FIG. 19).

  For this reason, for example, compared with the case where it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 matches the value stored in the success / failure determination table again when setting the variable display, the processing for setting the variable display is simplified. (Efficiency) can be achieved. Therefore, for example, a change display based on the timing at which a game ball enters the top winning opening 33a and the lower winning opening 33b (the timing of the first winning / failing determination process) and the fluctuation information stored in the special fluctuation holding area in advance is displayed. Even when the timing to start (the timing of the second success / failure determination process) overlaps, the game control can be performed accurately (with a margin for executing various random number counter update processes).

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since there are two starting ball entering means, that is, the top winning port 33a and the lower winning port 33b, there are cases where a game ball enters the upper winning port 33a and the lower winning port 33b at the same time. For this reason, the timing at which a game ball enters the upper winning opening 33a and the lower winning opening 33b at the same time (the timing of the first winning / failing determination process) and the timing at which the variable display is started (timing of the second winning / failing determination process). In the case of duplication, the amount of processing that should be executed within a certain amount of time will not be able to be processed within a certain amount of time (the processing performed in interrupt processing will not fit within the time allotted to interrupt processing). ), The processing may be lost (for example, the display of the decorative symbol display device 42 may be delayed). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the determination of success / failure at the start of the change (second success / failure determination process), only the first to third flags stored in the execution area of the special change reservation area are considered (big hit) Since it is not necessary to determine again whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 matches the value stored in the success / failure determination table), the game control can be performed accurately (without causing a processing failure).

  In the present embodiment, both of the fluctuation display based on the entrance to the top winning opening 33a (first fluctuation display) and the fluctuation display based on the entrance to the bottom winning opening 33b (second fluctuation display) are “ This is a configuration in which “continuous notice” can be derived. For this reason, the “continuous notice” can be enjoyed in both the first and second variation displays. Further, according to the present embodiment, the “continuous notice” is configured not to be derived unless two or more variable displays are held. Therefore, even though only one variable display is held, the “continuous notice” is executed, and the mode that occurs during the “continuous notice” is often the case only with a single variable display. It is possible to suppress such a situation that the balance of performance is lost.

  In the present embodiment, the second variation display is preferentially digested over the first variation display. In this case, for example, if the number of the second variable display is “0” and the number of the first variable display is “1”, and the second variable display is held, the number of held is “2”. However, the first variation display that was previously held is postponed to the second variation display. In other words, in such a situation, if “continuous notice” is set based on the fact that the second variable display is suspended, the “continuous notice” is originally executed, and thus the specification over multiple variable displays is performed. As a final result at the end of the performance, the first variation display is the last in spite of wanting to execute the second variation display at the end of a plurality of variation displays. There is a risk that it will not make sense. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the “continuous notice” is not derived in the second variation display unless two or more second variation displays are reserved. Therefore, the situation as described above can be avoided, and a situation where a “continuous notice” with a sense of incongruity is performed can be prevented.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a ball is entered into the lower winning opening 33b while “continuous advance notice” is being performed in the first variation display, the second corresponding to the lower winning opening 33b is entered. Since priority is given to digesting the two-variable display, there is a concern that the “continuous notice” may be interrupted. Therefore, for example, when a mode that is not normally derived is derived as a continuous notice, the player is the “continuous notice” even though the player has confirmed the execution of the “continuous notice” according to such a form. There is a possibility that an aspect indicating this is not continuously derived in a plurality of variable displays, which may lead to a decrease in interest. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, since the aspect that can be derived even when the continuous notice is not performed is used as the effect form used for the “continuous notice”, even if the “continuous notice” is interrupted, there is a sense of incongruity. Therefore, the above-mentioned problem can be avoided.

  In addition, when there is a ball entering the lower winning opening 33b while “continuous notice” is being performed in the first variation display, the “continuous notification” is also derived in the second variation display based on the entry. (In this case, it is included in a series of fluctuation displays for which “continuous notice” is performed). In this case, the second starting entry means is used before the first fluctuation display for which “continuous notice” is derived is digested. If the ball enters the ball, the “continuous notice” will become very long. And, for example, if “goes out” after the end of the “continuous notice”, the “continuous notice” may cause a decrease in interest. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even when there is a ball entering the second starting ball entry means during the “continuous notice” in the first variation display, it is based on the ball entered. In the second variation display, the control for deriving “continuous notice” is not performed. For this reason, the above situation can be avoided.

  In addition, the continuous notice mode (specific configuration effect) derived for each variable display is set when each variable display is executed (corresponding to the variable information for which the continuous notice flag is turned on) when the continuous notice is performed. As for the notice table as the continuous performance type determination value storage means that is taken into consideration when determining the type of the continuous notice mode, the fluctuation information (secondary output) of the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 261 at the start of the fluctuation display. Selection is made based on (variation information output during processing). Therefore, it is possible to select a continuous notice mode suitable for the variation display created based on the variation information of the variation pattern command output from the main control device 261 and set the variation display. For this reason, for example, as in the case where all of the continuous notice modes to be derived for each variable display are determined at once based on the fluctuation information of the advance command, each variable display mode and the continuous notice of each variable display are determined. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the aspect does not correspond and an uncomfortable feeling occurs. Furthermore, when the advance command is received and it is decided to perform the continuous notice so as to correspond each change display mode and the continuous notice mode in each change display, all the stored information in the hold information storage area are stored. In addition to judging the variation information, avoiding the situation that the processing becomes extremely complicated (the amount of processing becomes enormous) as in the case of determining all the continuous notice modes to be derived for each variation display at once. can do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when selecting one of “probability big hit”, “normal big win”, and “special probability change” when setting the variable display, it is stored in the execution area of the special variable holding area. It is only necessary to consider the result of the mode determination process performed during the start winning process (setting status of the probability variation flag, the normal flag, and the special flag). Therefore, it is not necessary to refer to the mode type determination table again to determine which game mode the value of the mode determination counter C2 corresponds to. For this reason, it is possible to simplify the processing when starting the variable display.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 14), the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is always “7, 307” which is a jackpot value in both the high probability state and the low probability state. And whether or not “8-16, 308-316”, which are jackpot values only in the high probability state, is determined. When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is “7, 307” in both the high probability state and the low probability state, the first success / failure flag is turned on, and in the high probability state, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is “ If the value is “8-16, 308-316”, the second success / failure flag is turned on. If the value of the big hit random number counter C1 is “8-16, 308-316” in the low probability state, the third success / failure flag is set. Is configured to turn on. Therefore, even when the game mode is different between the first timing at which the jackpot determination process is performed and the second timing at which the corresponding variation display is started, the execution of the special variation holding area is performed when the variation display is set. By taking into consideration the first to third success / failure flags of the area, it is possible to make an accurate determination of success / failure according to the game mode at that time. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform again the process of determining whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 matches the value of the success / failure determination table, and the process for setting the variable display can be simplified. .

  In addition, in this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the jackpot in the high probability state includes the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the jackpot in the low probability state (in this example, “7”). “307”). For example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is won in the low probability state is different from the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is won in the high probability state. Is also possible. For example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the jackpot in the low probability state is “1, 2”, even if the game mode differs between the timing of the start winning process and the timing of the change display setting process, In order to cope with the appropriateness determination corresponding to the game mode at the time of the display setting process timing, it is determined at most 22 times whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot ( C1 = 1, 2, 7-16, 307-316) need to be performed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the value corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot for the value corresponding to the jackpot in the high probability state and the overlapping value among the values corresponding to the jackpot in the low probability state. Therefore, it is not necessary to make the determination twice, and it is only necessary to perform the determination 20 times (C1 = 7 to 16, 307 to 316) at the maximum. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of processes such as determining whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 matches the value of the success / failure determination table, thereby simplifying the control.

  In the present embodiment, the mode determination process (see FIG. 15) is not only performed when it is determined to be “winning” in the jackpot determination process (when the first and second success / failure flags are on), but also in a low probability state. However, if it is determined as “winning” in the case of “No”, but it is determined as “winning” in the case of a high probability state (when the third winning / failing flag is on), it is also executed. For this reason, for example, even if it is determined to be “out” in the jackpot determination process, but is determined to be “winning” in the variable display setting process, the result of the mode determination process stored in the execution area ( By considering the probability change flag, normal flag, and special flag setting status), the type of jackpot state (number of rounds and type of game mode given after the jackpot state ends) can be determined. Therefore, in the variable display setting process, it is not necessary to perform a process for determining which value of the mode determination counter C2 matches the value in the mode type determination table. Simplification can be achieved.

  In the present embodiment, game mode types (“high probability state” and “low probability state”) are associated with jackpot state types (15 round jackpot state, 2 round jackpot state). The processing related to the determination of the game mode and the processing related to the determination of the type of jackpot state are made common. That is, a 15-round jackpot state is given, and after the end of the jackpot state, a “normal jackpot” to which a low probability state is given, a 15-round jackpot state is given, and after the jackpot state ends, a high A distinction is made between “probability change jackpot” to which a probability state is given and “special probability change” to which a high probability state is given after the end of the jackpot state. For this reason, compared with the case where the process regarding determination of game mode and the process regarding determination of the type of jackpot state are performed separately, a process can be simplified.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when selecting any of “rear out of front / rear reach”, “reach other than front / rear out of reach”, and “complete out” when setting the variable display, it is stored in the execution area of the special variable hold area. The result of the reach determination process performed during the start winning process (the setting status of the front / rear flag, the non-front / rear flag, and the complete miss flag) is merely taken into consideration. Therefore, it is not necessary to refer to the reach determination table again to determine which reach (or “completely out”) the value of the variation selection counter C3 is. For this reason, it is possible to simplify the processing when starting the variable display.

  In the present embodiment, the reach determination process (see FIG. 16) is determined not only when the jackpot determination process is determined to be “out” but also determined as “winning” in the high probability state. If there is, it is also executed when it is determined that it is “out” (when the second flag is on). For this reason, for example, even if it is determined to be “winning” in the jackpot determination process but “missed” in the variable display setting process, the result of the reach determination process stored in the execution area ( Reach types (“front / rear out of reach”, “reach out of front / rear out of reach”, and “complete out”) can be determined by taking into account the front / rear flag, non-front / rear flag, and complete out flag setting status. Therefore, in the variation display setting process, it is not necessary to perform a process of determining which value of the variation type counter C3 matches with the value of the reach determination table, and the process for starting the variable display is simplified. Can be achieved.

  In the present embodiment, the random number storage area for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in each reserved area and execution area of the special variable reserved area (first special variable reserved area, second special variable reserved area). A winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the mode determination counter C2 and a reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3 are provided. Furthermore, after the jackpot determination process (step S505, step S513), the mode determination process (step S506, step S514), and the reach determination process (step S507, step S515) are performed, these determination results are stored in the special variable holding area. Remembered. However, apart from the success / failure random number storage area, the winning type random number storage area, and the reach random number storage area, an area for storing the determination result of the jackpot determination process, the mode determination process, and the reach determination process is not provided separately. These determination results are overwritten in the success / failure random number storage area, the winning type random number storage area, and the reach random number storage area, respectively. For this reason, for example, the configuration can be simplified compared to the case where a storage area for storing the determination result is provided separately from the success / failure random number storage area, the winning type random number storage area, and the reach random number storage area.

  In addition, the success / failure random number storage area uses 2 bytes, and the bit pattern for 16 bits differs depending on whether the winner is selected or not. For this reason, due to the fact that the determination result of the winning / losing lottery is rewritten due to noise or the like, it is determined that the winning combination is determined not to be won in the jackpot determining process, but it is determined to be winning in the variable display setting process. It is possible to prevent a situation in which it is determined that the winning combination is determined to be out of place in the variable display setting process even though it is determined to be a winner.

(Second Embodiment)
Hereinafter, a second embodiment will be described. Since the basic configuration of the second embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment, the description of the same configuration is omitted for the sake of convenience (the configuration of the omitted portion is the same as that of the first embodiment), and the characteristic portion is omitted. The explanation will be centered.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the success / failure determination table referred to when performing the determination of success / failure stores values corresponding to jackpots (hereinafter referred to as “winning corresponding values”) divided into groups and stored in each group. Corresponding individually, numbers (hereinafter referred to as “address numbers”) as identification information in ascending order from “1” are stored. Specifically, the winning / nothing determination table includes a winning correspondence value “7,307” corresponding to the address number “1”, a winning correspondence value “8, 9, 10” corresponding to the address number “2”, and an address number. Winning corresponding value “11, 12, 13” corresponding to “3”, winning corresponding value “14, 15, 16” corresponding to address number “4”, winning corresponding value corresponding to address number “5” “308, 309, 310”, the winning correspondence value “311, 312, 313” corresponding to the address number “6”, and the winning correspondence value “314, 315, 316” corresponding to the address number “7” are stored. ing.

  In addition, as described above, the number of jackpot random number counters C1 that are jackpots (winning) is different between the high probability state and the low probability state. In the present embodiment, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (7 to 16, 307 to 316) that are jackpots in the high probability state are all the values (7,307) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot in the low probability state. It is included. Furthermore, among the winning correspondence values stored in the success / failure determination table, the winning correspondence values (7, 307) that are won even in the low probability state are distinguished from the winning correspondence values that are a big hit only in the high probability state. It is divided. That is, the winning correspondence value “7, 307” that is a big hit in both the high probability state and the low probability state belongs to the group corresponding to the address number “1”, and the winning correspondence value “8˜ 16, 308 to 316 ”belong to the group corresponding to the address numbers“ 2 ”to“ 7 ”. The success / failure determination table is referred to for the determination of success / failure in both the high probability state and the low probability state game mode (as in the first embodiment, the success / failure determination table includes the high probability state and the low probability state). Two are not provided for each probability state individually).

  In addition, in the execution area of each special variable holding area and each holding area of the present embodiment, a success / failure random number storage area that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a winning type random number storage area that stores the value of the mode determination counter C2, In addition to the reach random number storage area for storing the value of the selection counter C3, an address information storage area capable of storing the address number of the success / failure determination table is provided.

  Here, the start winning process in step S304 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S7001, it is determined from the detection information of the second start winning switch 224b whether or not the game ball has won the lower winning opening 33b. If the determination in step S7001 is affirmative, in step S7002, the value of the lower hold counter Nb that counts the variable display hold count triggered by winning the lower winning opening 33b is set to the upper limit value (“4” in this embodiment). ) Is determined. If a negative determination is made in step S7002, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7002, the process advances to step S7003 to increment the lower hold counter Nb by one.

  In the subsequent step S7004, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the mode determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 updated in the random number updating process in step S303 are used as the first of the reserved areas that are free of the second special variable reserved area. Store in the area. After step S7004, the process proceeds to step S7005.

  In step S7005, a jackpot random number value determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special variable suspension area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. Details of the jackpot random number determination process will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S7006, reach random number value determination processing is performed to determine whether or not the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to “rearward / rearward reach”. Details of the reach random number value determination process will be described later.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random value determination processing in step S7005 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S7101, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special variation holding area is one of the winning correspondence values “7 to 16, 307 to 316” stored in the determination table. It is determined whether or not.

  In FIG. 41, the process of step S7101 is described in a simplified manner for convenience. Actually, whether the value of the big hit random number counter C1 is “7” or not is “8”. For example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is compared with each winning correspondence value to make a determination one by one. If an affirmative determination is made in this determination, an affirmative determination is made in step S7101, and if a negative determination is made in any determination, a negative determination is made in step S7101.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7101, the present process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7101, the address number of the group to which the winning correspondence value that matches the value of the big hit random number counter C1 among the address numbers set in the success / failure determination table in step S7102 belongs (FIG. 42). Is stored in the address information storage area. For example, if the winning correspondence value that matches the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is “7”, the address number “1” is stored in the address information storage area. In the present embodiment, the processing in step S7102 corresponds to group information storage processing.

  In the next step S7103, it is determined whether or not the high probability state flag is ON, and it is determined whether or not it is in a high probability state. As described above, the winning correspondence values that are jackpots in the high probability state are “7 to 16, 307 to 316”. For this reason, the case where an affirmative determination is made in both step S7101 and step S7103 is a case where a jackpot state occurs (if there is no transition to a low probability state). In the second embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the probability variation flag, the special accuracy flag, and the normal flag are not set. Therefore, in the end setting process in step S1207 (see FIG. 22) in the variable winning device control process. The high probability state flag setting processing, time shortening state flag setting processing, high pitching state flag setting processing, variation count counter setting processing, and the like to be performed are the results of the variation display setting processing (see FIG. 44) described later. Based on.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7103, that is, if a big hit state occurs, the process ends after turning on the first notice flag in step S7104. It should be noted that the first notice flag is turned off after setting information indicating that the first command is a big hit in the first command setting processing in step S7007 described later.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S7103, that is, in a low probability state, in step S7105, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is in the low probability state among the winning correspondence values stored in the success / failure determination table. It is determined whether or not the winning correspondence value that is a big hit, that is, the winning correspondence value “7, 307” belonging to the group corresponding to the address number “1” is matched.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7105, that is, if a big hit state occurs, the process ends after turning on the first notice flag in step S7106. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7105, the present process is terminated as it is.

  Next, the reach random number value determination processing in step S7006 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S7201, it is determined whether or not the first notice flag is set in the jackpot random number determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7201, that is, if the game is a big hit, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7201, the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the second special variation holding area is set to “rearward / rearward reach” in step S7202 by referring to the reach determination table. It is determined whether or not the corresponding value is “0, 1”. If the determination in step S7202 is affirmative, that is, if “rearward / rearward reach” is set, in step S7203, the second notice flag is turned on, and then the process ends. It should be noted that the second notice flag is turned off after setting information indicating that the previous command is out-of-front reach in the advance command setting processing in step S7007 described later. On the other hand, if the determination in step S7202 is negative, that is, if “reach other than front / rear out of reach” or “completely out”, the process is terminated.

  Note that in the reach random number value determination process, only determination is made as to whether or not “rear out of front / rear out”, and “reach out of front / rear out of front” and “complete out” are not distinguished. Thereby, the burden of the process performed at the time of starting winning is reduced as much as possible. It should be noted that more detailed reach determination for distinguishing between “front / rear out of reach”, “reach other than front / rear out of reach”, and “complete out” is performed at the start of the change (in the change display setting process).

  Returning to the description of FIG. 40, in step S7007 following step S7006, a process for setting a starting command is performed. In the advance command, the fluctuation information stored on hold (predetermined information used for determining the contents of the fluctuation display) is a fluctuation display triggered by either the winning winning opening 33a or the lower winning opening 33b. Information indicating whether or not it is variation information corresponding to the jackpot, and information indicating reach (out-of-front / rear reach) are output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201). The In the advance command setting process, after the advance command is set, the first and second notice flags are turned off. In the present embodiment, information indicating that the jackpot is set when the first notice flag is turned on is set in the advance command, and information indicating that the front / rear reach is reached when the second notice flag is turned on. Is set as the first command.

  After the process of step S7007 or when a negative determination is made in step S7001, it is determined in step S7008 whether or not the game ball has won the top winning opening 33a based on the detection information of the first start winning unit switch 224a. To do. If a negative determination is made in step S7008, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made, in step S7009, the value of the upper hold counter Na that counts the number of hold of the variable display triggered by winning in the upper winning opening 33a is the upper limit value (“4” in this embodiment). ) Is determined. If a negative determination is made in step S7009, the present process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7009, the process advances to step S7010 to increment the upper hold counter Na by one.

  In the subsequent step S7011, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the mode determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3 are stored in the first area among the reserved areas in which the first special variable reservation area is vacant. After step S7011, the process proceeds to step S7012.

  In step S7012, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 newly stored in the first special variable suspension area is a value corresponding to the jackpot (whether or not it matches the winning correspondence value stored in the hit determination table). The jackpot random number value determination process is performed. Note that the jackpot random number value determination process in step S7012 is the same as the jackpot random number value determination process in step S7005, and the information related to the variation display to be processed is based on the ball entering the top winning opening 33a. The only difference is. For this reason, detailed description is omitted for convenience. It should be noted that the first notice flag is turned off after setting information indicating that the first command is a big hit in the first command setting processing in step S7014 described later.

  In the subsequent step S7013, a reach random number value determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the first special variation reservation area is “front / rear out of reach”. Note that the reach random number value determination process in step S7013 is the same as the reach random number value determination process in step S7006, and the information related to the variable display to be processed is based on the ball entering the top winning opening 33a. The only difference is. For this reason, detailed description is omitted for convenience. It should be noted that the second notice flag is turned off after setting information indicating that the previous command is out-of-front reach in the advance command setting process in step S7014 described later.

  After step S7013, in step S7014, a starting command setting process is performed, and this process ends.

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the top winning port 33a and the lower winning port 33b, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 is directly stored in the first and second special variable holding areas, and then the big hit random Although the numerical value determination process and the reach random number value determination process are executed, the present invention is not particularly limited to such a structure. For example, a temporary storage area for temporarily storing these counter values when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like is provided, and for the information stored in the temporary storage area, the jackpot random number value determination processing and reach After the random value determination process is executed, the counter value may be stored in the corresponding reserved areas of the first and second special variable reserved areas.

  In the present embodiment, the processing in steps S7004 and S7011 corresponds to determination value extraction processing and determination value storage processing. The jackpot random number determination process in steps S7005 and S7012 corresponds to a first win / fail determination process. The process of setting the first notice flag (step S7104, step S7106) in the big hit random value determination process corresponds to the result storing process. The process of setting the advance command in steps S7007 and S7014 and outputting the advance command to the sub-control device 262 in step S201 constitutes the primary output process. The reach random number value determination process in steps S7006 and S7013 corresponds to the first reach determination process.

  Next, the variable display setting process in step S807 in the first display control process (see FIG. 18) will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, step S7401, step S7402, and step S7408 of the variable display setting process correspond to the second determination result. The processes in steps S7413 and S7416 correspond to the second reach determination process. Further, the process of setting the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation display setting process and outputting the fluctuation pattern command to the sub-control device 262 in step S201 constitutes the secondary output process.

  First, in step S7401, the setting state of the high probability state flag is viewed to determine whether or not the state is a high probability state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7401, whether or not a big hit state occurs is determined in step S7402.

  In step S7402, first, the address information storage area of the execution area of the special variable suspension area is confirmed. And among the winning correspondence values in the success / failure determination table, the winning correspondence values belonging to the group corresponding to the address number stored in the address information storage area and the winning random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable holding area are stored. It is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 matches. For example, if the address number stored in the address information storage area is “3”, the winning correspondence belonging to the group corresponding to the address number “3” among the winning correspondence values in the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the values, that is, “11”, “12”, “13”, and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special variable holding area match. As a result, whether or not the winning correspondence value matches the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is determined at most three times.

  If the address information storage area of the execution area of the special variable suspension area is confirmed in step S7402 and no address number is stored in the address information storage area, a negative determination is made in step S7402. It will be.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7402, that is, if it is determined that the winning lottery is won in a high probability state (a big hit state occurs), the process proceeds to step S7403 and the second mode type determination table is referred to. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the mode determination counter C2 stored in the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable holding area matches any of the values “13 to 19” corresponding to “normal jackpot” To do. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7403, that is, if it is “ordinary jackpot”, the normal jackpot variation pattern is determined in step S7404 and set in the variation pattern command. Thereafter, in step S7405, the normal symbol (“A2” in the present embodiment) is set as the symbol command, and the process proceeds to step S7421.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7403, that is, if the value of the mode determination counter C2 is one of the values “0 to 12” corresponding to “probability variation big hit”, the probability variation big hit variation pattern in step S7406. Is determined and set to the fluctuation pattern command. Thereafter, in step S7407, the probability variation symbol ("A1" in the present embodiment) is set as the symbol command, and the process proceeds to step S7421.

  In steps S7405 and S7407, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 are confirmed, and the decorative symbols are displayed based on the values of the first and second variation type counters CS1 and CS2. The pattern variation mode is determined. The relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the reach pattern (variation type) and the relationship between the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation time are defined in advance by a table or the like for each game mode.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7401, that is, if the state is a low probability state, whether or not a big hit state occurs is determined in step S7408.

  In step S7408, the winning correspondence value belonging to the group corresponding to the address number “1” (ie, “7, 307”) among the winning correspondence values in the success / failure determination table without checking the address information storage area, and the special It is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the validity random number storage area of the execution area of the variable suspension area matches.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7408, that is, if it is determined that the winning lottery is won in the low probability state, the first mode type determination table is referred to in step S7409, and the execution area of the special variable holding area is determined. It is determined whether or not the value of the mode determination counter C2 stored in the winning type random number storage area matches any of the values “13 to 19” corresponding to “normal jackpot”. If a positive determination is made in step S7409, the process proceeds to step S7404.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7409, in step S7410, the first mode type determination table is referred to, and the value of the mode determination counter C2 is any one of values “9 to 12” corresponding to “special probability change”. Determine whether they match. If a negative determination is made in step S7410, that is, if the value of the mode determination counter C2 is one of the values “0 to 8” corresponding to “probability big hit”, the process proceeds to step S7406.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7410, that is, if “special probability variation”, the special probability variation pattern is determined in step S7411 and set in the variation pattern command. Thereafter, in step S7412, the chance symbol (“A6” in the present embodiment) is set as a symbol command, and the process proceeds to step S7421.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7402, or if a negative determination is made in step S7408, that is, if the winning lottery results in a failure ("missing"), the reach determination table is set in step S7413. In consideration, whether or not the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area coincides with one of the values “0, 1” corresponding to “out-of-front / rear reach”. Determine. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7413, that is, if “rearward / rearward reach” is determined, a front / rear reach fluctuation pattern is determined in step S7414 and set in a fluctuation pattern command. After that, in step S7415, the back-and-forth back symbol (“A3” in the present embodiment) is set as a symbol command, and the flow proceeds to step S7421.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7413, in step S7416, the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is a value “2 to 21” corresponding to “reach other than front / back deviation”. It is discriminated whether it matches any of the above. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7416, that is, if “reach other than front / rear” is determined, a reach fluctuation pattern other than front / rear deviation is determined in step S7417 and set as a fluctuation pattern command. Thereafter, in step S7418, symbols other than front and rear deviation (in this embodiment, “A4”) are set as symbol commands, and the flow advances to step S7421.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7416, that is, if it is “completely out”, an outlier variation pattern is determined in step S7419 and set in the variation pattern command. Thereafter, in step S7420, the completely off symbol ("A5" in the present embodiment) is set as a symbol command, and the flow proceeds to step S7421.

  Note that when determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation in steps S7414, S7417, and S7419, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. Is the same as step S7405 and step S7407.

  In step S7421, a start setting process (see FIG. 19: step S920) indicating that a condition for performing switching display (variable display) is established in the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed. Then, after step S7421 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

  Next, the second continuous notice setting process in step S4112 in the hold information storage process (see FIG. 32) will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the second continuous notice setting process is performed when the sub-control device 262 confirms reception of the starting command (step S4101: YES), and the starting command corresponds to entering a ball into the lower winning opening 33b (step). S4102: YES).

  First, in step S7801, it is determined whether or not the value of the downward fluctuation hold counter Ne is “2” or more. If a negative determination is made in step S7801, the process is terminated as it is. That is, when two or more variation displays (second variation display) based on the ball entering the lower winning a prize opening 33b are not stored on hold, the continuous notice is not performed.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7801, the change information newly stored in the second hold information storage area Me in step S7802 corresponds to the jackpot (in the main controller 261, the first notice flag Is the information corresponding to the fluctuation information set to ON). If an affirmative determination is made in step S7802, the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the second hold information storage area Me is “1 to 30” in consideration of the corresponding notice determination table in step S7803. It is discriminated whether or not it matches any of the above. If a negative determination is made in step S7803, the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S7803, the process proceeds to step S7807. In step S7807, the continuous notice flags of all the reserved areas in which the variation information is stored among the reserved areas of the second reserved information storage area Me are turned on. However, the continuous notice flag in the execution area is not turned on. After this step S7807, the present process is terminated.

  Also, if a negative determination is made in step S7802, that is, if the variation information newly stored in the second hold information storage area Me corresponds to “out”, in step S7804 the second hold information It is determined whether or not the variation information newly stored in the storage area Me corresponds to the back-and-forth deviation reach (corresponding to the variation information for which the second notice flag is set on in the main control device 261). To do. When an affirmative determination is made in step S7804, the value of the continuous notice counter stored in the second hold information storage area Me matches any of “1 to 20” in consideration of the corresponding notice determination table in step S7805. It is determined whether or not to do so. If a negative determination is made in step S7805, the present process is terminated as is. If an affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to step S7807.

  Further, when a negative determination is made in step S7804, that is, when the variation information newly stored in the second hold information storage area Me corresponds to “reach other than front / rear out” or “complete out”, In step S7806, the corresponding notice determination table is determined to determine whether or not the value of the continuous notice counter matches “1”. If a negative determination is made in step S7806, the present process is terminated as is. If an affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to step S7807.

  Next, the first continuous notice setting process in step S4107 in the hold information storage process (see FIG. 32) will be described with reference to FIG. The first continuous notice setting process is performed when the sub-control device 262 confirms reception of the starting command (step S4101: YES), and the starting command corresponds to entering the top winning hole 33a (step). S4102: NO).

  First, in step S7901, it is determined whether or not a value obtained by adding the value of the up fluctuation holding counter Nd and the value of the down fluctuation holding counter Ne is “2” or more. If a negative determination is made in step S7901, the process ends. That is, when two or more change displays (first change display) and second change displays based on the winning ball 33a are not stored, continuous advance notice is not performed.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7901, it is determined in step S7902 whether or not the variation information newly stored in the first hold information storage area Md corresponds to a jackpot. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7902, the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the first hold information storage area Md is “1 to 40” in consideration of the corresponding notice determination table in step S7903. It is discriminated whether or not it matches any of the above. If a negative determination is made in step S7903, the present process ends. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S7903, the process proceeds to step S7907.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7902, it is determined in step S7904 whether or not the variation information newly stored in the first hold information storage area Md corresponds to the back and forth reach. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7904, the value of the continuous notice counter stored in the first hold information storage area Md matches one of “1 to 30” in consideration of the corresponding notice determination table in step S7905. It is determined whether or not to do so. If a negative determination is made in step S7905, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step S7907.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7904, it is determined in step S7906 whether or not the value of the continuous notice counter matches “1” with reference to the corresponding notice determination table. If a negative determination is made in step S7906, the present process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to step S7907.

  In step S7907, it is determined whether or not a value obtained by adding the value of the up fluctuation holding counter Nd and the value of the down fluctuation holding counter Ne is “4” or less. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7907, in step S7908, the continuous notice flag of all the reserved areas in which the variable information is stored among the reserved areas of the first and second reserved information storage areas Md and Me is turned on. To. After the step S7908, this process is terminated. Note that the continuous notice flag in the execution area is not turned on.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7907, it is determined in step S7909 whether or not the value of the up fluctuation hold counter Nd is “4”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7909, in step S7910, after turning on the continuous notice flags of all the reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas) in the first reserved information storage area Md, this process is terminated. .

  If a negative determination is made in step S7909, it is determined in step S7911 whether or not the value of the up fluctuation hold counter Nd is “3”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7911, in step S7912, the continuous notice flag of all the reserved areas (first to third reserved areas) in which the variation information is stored in the first reserved information storage area Md, and After turning on the continuous notice flag of the reserved area to be executed last (the variable display based on the stored variable information) among the reserved areas in which the variable information of the second reserved information storage area Me is stored This process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7911, it is determined in step S7913 whether or not the value of the up fluctuation hold counter Nd is “2”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7913, in step S7914, continuous notice flags of all the reserved areas (first and second reserved areas) in which variation information is stored in the first reserved information storage area Md, and After turning on the continuous notice flag of the reserved area that will be executed second and last from among the reserved areas in which the variation information of the second reserved information storage area Me is stored, this process ends. .

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7913, that is, only the newly stored variation information is stored in the holding area of the first holding information storage area Md, in step S7915, the first holding information is stored. Among the information storage area Md, the continuous notice flag of all the reserved areas (first reserved area) where the variable information is stored, and among the reserved areas where the variable information of the second reserved information storage area Me is stored, Finally, after turning on the continuous notice flag of the reserved area that will be executed second and third from the end, this process ends.

  As described above in detail, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a specific effect (“continuous notice”) over a plurality of continuous variation displays is made based on whether or not a big hit state occurs. It is the structure which determines whether to derive or not. For this reason, when a game ball enters the upper winning opening 33a or the lower winning opening 33b (in the start winning process), a determination is made as to whether or not a big win state occurs (first determination process). Further, when setting the variable display, in order to make an accurate determination of the appropriateness appropriate for the game mode at that time, the determination of the validity (second determination determination) is performed again in the variable display setting process.

  By the way, in the high-probability determination, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 extracted in the start winning process matches the winning correspondence value (“7-16, 307-316”) stored in the determination table. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is “7”, “8”, or “9”.・ It is performed one by one. For this reason, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is “7”, it is only necessary to perform the determination once. However, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is “316” or “7 to 16, 307 to If the value is other than “316”, the determination must be performed 20 times. Then, the timing at which a game ball enters the upper winning opening 33a and the lower winning opening 33b (start winning process timing) overlaps with the timing for setting (starting) the variable display (timing for the variable display setting process). In this case, it is necessary to perform the determination 40 times at a maximum almost simultaneously, which may cause a problem in game control.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the validity determination (second validity determination process) performed at the time of setting the variable display (variable display setting process), the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special variable suspension area is used. Whether the value matches the winning correspondence value belonging to the group corresponding to the address number stored in the address information storage area of the execution area of the special variable hold area among the winning correspondence values stored in the success / failure determination table It is performed by discriminating. That is, for example, when the address number stored in the address information storage area is “3”, whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is “11”, “12”, “13” The determination is made at most three times, such as whether or not. In other words, it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 matches the winning corresponding value while the determination is performed three times. For this reason, it is only necessary to make the determination three times at most (up to two times when the address number stored in the address information storage area is “1”). The maximum number of discriminations can be greatly reduced. Therefore, for example, a change display based on the timing at which a game ball enters the top winning opening 33a and the lower winning opening 33b (the timing of the first winning / failing determination process) and the fluctuation information stored in the special fluctuation holding area in advance is displayed. Even when the timing to start (the timing of the second success / failure determination process) overlaps, the game control can be performed accurately (with a margin for executing various random number counter update processes).

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since there are two starting ball entering means, that is, the top winning port 33a and the lower winning port 33b, there are cases where a game ball enters the upper winning port 33a and the lower winning port 33b at the same time. For this reason, the timing at which a game ball enters the upper winning opening 33a and the lower winning opening 33b at the same time (the timing of the first winning / failing determination process) and the timing at which the variable display is started (timing of the second winning / failing determination process). In the case of duplication, the amount of processing that should be executed within a certain amount of time will not be able to be processed within a certain amount of time (the processing performed in interrupt processing will not fit within the time allotted to interrupt processing). ), The processing may be lost (for example, the display of the decorative symbol display device 42 may be delayed). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of times of the determination in the determination of success / failure at the start of the change (second determination result determination) can be significantly reduced. Not)

  Note that according to the present embodiment, when setting the variable display (variable display setting process), it is not determined whether or not it is true based on the result of the jackpot random number value determination process performed in advance. In the processing, it is possible to determine whether or not it is true by directly comparing the value of the extracted jackpot random number counter C1 with the winning correspondence value stored in the success / failure determination table.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game determination mode that is considered in the low probability state and the game determination table that is considered in the high probability state are not separately provided, and either the low probability state or the high probability state game mode is provided. The same success / failure determination table is also taken into consideration. Specifically, in the high probability state, whether or not all winning correspondence values stored in the success / failure determination table match the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 can be determined. Can determine whether or not the winning correspondence value stored in the success / failure determination table matches with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the winning correspondence value won in the lottery determination in the low probability state. . In particular, in the present embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is won in the high probability state (“7 to 16, 307 to 316”) is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is won in the low probability state (“7 , 307 "). For this reason, when the success / failure determination table is shared as described above, the success / failure determination table can be simplified (the number of winning correspondence values stored in the success / failure determination table can be reduced by two). . Further, the winning correspondence values that are won in both the low probability state and the high probability state are grouped separately from the winning correspondence values that are won only in the high probability state. Specifically, the winning correspondence value “7, 307” that is a big hit in both the high probability state and the low probability state belongs to the group corresponding to the address number “1”, and the winning correspondence value “ “8-16, 308-316” belong to the groups corresponding to the address numbers “2”-“7”. For this reason, in the low probability state, it is possible to reliably determine whether or not the game is successful by referring to the winning correspondence value belonging to the group corresponding to the address number “1”. Therefore, the determination of success / failure in each game mode can be performed relatively smoothly and reliably without providing the determination table for each game mode.

  Further, for example, the address number is stored in the address information only when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 matches the winning correspondence value corresponding to the game mode at that time in the jackpot random number determination process of the start winning process. If the configuration is stored in the area, the following problems occur. For example, when the jackpot random number value determination process is performed in the low probability state and the corresponding variable display setting (variable display setting process) is performed in the high probability state, the jackpot extracted in the start winning process Assuming that the value of the random number counter C1 is a value that wins the winning lottery only in a high-probability state, the address information storage area does not store the address number. It may be determined that a big hit state is not generated).

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, not only when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 extracted in the start winning process is a value that is won in the lottery determination at the timing of the start winning process, Even if it is determined that the winning lottery is a value that will be won if the game mode changes, the corresponding address number is stored in the address information storage area, although it is not a value that wins the winning lottery at the timing of the start winning process. It is configured to store (see step S7101, step S7102). For this reason, the said malfunction can be avoided and the situation where a player suffers a disadvantage by unjustly losing the right of a jackpot state can be prevented.

  Further, for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is not won in the low probability state but is won in the high probability state is extracted in the start winning process, so that the address number is stored in the address information storage area. When the corresponding variable display setting (variable display setting process) is performed in a low probability state, in the variable display setting process, the winning corresponding value of the group corresponding to the address number and the execution area of the special variable holding area are stored. If it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 matches, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is displayed in a variable manner in spite of the fact that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is not won in the winning lottery in a low probability state. There is a possibility that it is determined that the winning is made in the setting process. That is, it is determined whether or not the winning correspondence value of the group that does not win in the low probability state matches the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and it is determined that they match further and a jackpot state is generated. There is concern.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the variable display setting process is performed in a low probability state, in the variable display setting process, regardless of the address number stored in the address information storage area, the start winning prize It is configured to determine whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 extracted in the process matches the winning corresponding value belonging to the group corresponding to the address number “1” in the winning determination table. For this reason, the said malfunction can be avoided and a success / failure determination can be performed reliably. In addition, when there is a low probability state, since the number of winning correspondence values to be won in the winning lottery is small (two), it is not necessary to forcibly reduce the number of times of determination of success / failure determination in the variable display setting process as described above. However, the game control can be dealt with sufficiently without causing any trouble.

  Further, in the start winning process (see FIG. 40), not only the jackpot random number determination process as the primary success / failure determination process but also the reach random number value determination process as the first reach determination process is performed. Whether or not to execute “continuous notice” is determined based on the processing result. In addition to changing the rate at which “continuous notice” is derived depending on whether or not a big hit state occurs, “continuous back and forth reach” occurs or not even in the case of “out”. The rate at which "notice" is derived is changed. Therefore, it is possible to make more detailed settings for “continuous notice”, thereby further enhancing the interest.

  In addition, the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot type determination is not performed at the time of starting winning (in the starting winning process). In addition, the reach random value determination process also only determines whether the reach is out of front or back. For this reason, processing in the start winning process can be reduced. In particular, in the present embodiment, there are two start winning means, an upper winning opening 33a and a lower winning opening 33b. In other words, even when the number of processes performed based on the game balls entering the winning ports 33a and 33b is increased by one, the case where the game balls enter the upper winning port 33a and the lower winning port 33b simultaneously is considered. As a whole, two processes are added. For this reason, by reducing the processing at the time of starting winning a prize, the effect of suppressing the maximum processing amount to be performed at one time can be more reliably achieved.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows.

  (A) In the above-described embodiment, the continuous notice is performed by deriving effects (bubbles or fish school) that can be derived in the variable display even when the continuous notice is not performed, in a plurality of continuous variable displays. However, it is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, an effect peculiar to the continuous notice (the player can determine that it is a continuous notice) may be derived in some cases, or only a specific effect may be derived.

  In the above embodiment, when it is determined in the continuous notice setting process (step S4107, step S4112) that the continuous notice is given, the continuous notice mode ("small bubbles", "small" A combination of “bubbles” and “medium bubbles”, or a combination of “small bubbles” and “fish school”) is derived, but is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, when any of the notice table A to notice table D (see FIG. 37) is selected and the value of the notice type counter is “9”, the continuous notice mode is not derived (“small bubbles”, A combination of “small bubbles” and “medium bubbles” and a combination of “small bubbles” and “fish school” may not be derived. In this case, even if the continuous notice is performed, the form of the continuous notice may not be derived in a plurality of corresponding variable displays. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sense of incongruity that there is a ball entering the lower winning a prize opening 33b while the continuous advance notice is being performed only by the upward change display, and the continuous advance notice is interrupted.

  (B) In the above embodiment, the big hit random number counter C1, the mode determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 are separated, but at least two may be integrated. For example, among the counter values “0 to 599”, “7,307” is a value corresponding to the winning in the low probability state, and “8 to 10, 308 to 310” is the back and forth reach in the low probability state. Corresponding value, “11-20, 311-320” is a value corresponding to reach other than back and forth in the low probability state, and “7-16, 307-316” is a value corresponding to winning in the high probability state “17-19, 317-319” are values corresponding to the back and forth reach in the high probability state, and “20 to 29, 320 to 329” are values corresponding to the reach other than the back and forth out in the high probability state. It may be set such that it exists.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the type of the jackpot state is determined, so that the type of game mode given after the jackpot ends is also determined. It is good also as a structure by which the determination of jackpot) and the determination of the type (high probability state, low probability state) of game mode are performed separately. For example, in addition to the mode determination counter C2 for determining the type of game mode, a winning type random number counter as a winning type random number generating means for determining the type of jackpot state may be provided.

  (C) In the above embodiment, it is configured so that the distribution of the type of jackpot state is different between the case where a game ball enters the top prize opening 33a and the case where a game ball enters the bottom prize opening 33b. It may be. Further, the content of the type of jackpot state is not particularly limited, and for example, a type in which a low probability state is given after two rounds of jackpot may be set.

  In addition, in the above embodiment, the “special probability change” may occur only when there is a ball entering the top winning port 33a. You may comprise so that "probability change" may generate | occur | produce. In addition, when adopting such a configuration, the ratio (distribution rate) of occurrence of “special probability change” is different (for example, when entering the top winning opening 33a than when entering the lower winning opening 33b) It may be configured so that special probability changes are likely to occur.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, two start pitching means (upper winning hole 33a and lower winning hole 33b) are provided, but one or three or more may be provided. In addition, the number of game balls paid out when a game ball enters the upper winning opening 33a may be different from the number of game balls paid out when entering the lower winning opening 33b. In addition, in the above embodiment, the starting pitching means (upper winning hole 33a and lower winning hole 33b) are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and in the normal mode, it is hardly possible to enter the lower winning hole 33b. Although it has a configuration, it is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, two start ball entering means may be arranged on the left and right, or the opening / closing member 33c may be omitted.

  (D) In the above embodiment, the second variation display based on the ball entering the lower winning opening 33b is given priority over the first variation display based on the ball entering the upper winning port 33a. Although it is configured, the present invention is not particularly limited to such a configuration, and it may be configured such that the variable display corresponding to the order in which balls are entered in the top winning opening 33a and the lower winning opening 33b is executed.

  (E) In the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice is executed based on the results of the jackpot determination process, the mode determination process, and the reach determination process. However, the present invention is particularly limited to such a configuration. The execution of the continuous notice may be determined based on any one of these or a predetermined combination thereof. For example, it may be determined whether to execute the continuous notice based only on the result of the jackpot determination process. In this case, the process can be simplified, for example, the mode determination process and the reach determination process are omitted. However, it is possible to make more detailed settings for the continuous notice by determining whether to execute the continuous notice based on the results of the jackpot determination process, the mode determination process, and the reach determination process. Can be achieved. In addition, it is good also as determining whether continuous notice is performed based on the result of either a mode determination process and a reach determination process.

  (F) In the above-described embodiment, continuous notification is performed in both the first variation display and the second variation display. For example, the continuous notification is performed only in the second variation display. It may be configured such that continuous notice is not performed in the variable display. Moreover, in the said embodiment, although it was the structure in which a continuous notice is performed regardless of what gaming state (except for a jackpot state), for example, it is good also as a structure in which a continuous notice is performed only in a high probability state. The decorative symbol display device 42 may be omitted, and the continuous notice may be performed by changing the lighting mode of the special display devices 43L and 43R.

  (G) In the above embodiment, the main process (see FIG. 9) is followed by the main process (see FIG. 9), followed by the normal process (see FIG. 10). is not. For example, as shown in FIG. 38, after step S111 of the main process, processing such as updating of the counter value performed in steps S209 to S218 of the normal process in the above embodiment is performed (step S210 is omitted). As shown in FIG. 39, for example, in the timer interrupt process performed every 2 msec, the process performed in steps S201 to S208 of the normal process in the above embodiment and the NMI interrupt process in the above embodiment are performed. It is also possible to perform the processing in step S401. In this case, when the timing of entering the winning openings 33a and 33b and the start timing of the fluctuation display overlap, it is easy to cause a situation that the processing does not fit within the specified time, and the update processing of various random number counter values is performed. Although there is a concern that it may not be able to be sufficiently performed or processing may be easily lost, such a problem can be prevented by simplifying the processing when setting the variable display as in the above embodiment. be able to. In this case, as the processing of step S401, for example, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501, and when the output of the power failure signal SK1 is confirmed, The flag which shows generation | occurrence | production of ON is turned on. Further, the processing in step S401 may be performed separately as NMI interrupt processing, as in the above embodiment. If a negative determination is made in step S210 in FIG. 38, processing for updating the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the mode determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 may be performed. In this case, the random number update process (step S303) and the random number initial value update process (step S302) performed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 39 may be omitted.

  (H) In the above-described embodiment, the sub-control device 262 performs processing related to continuous notice setting (continuous notice setting processing, notice type setting processing), but the main control device 261 performs processing related to continuous notice setting. It is good as well.

  (I) In the first embodiment, the information on whether or not a big hit state is generated is overwritten on the success / failure random number storage area for storing the value of the big hit random number counter C1. It is not limited to a simple configuration. For example, a storage area for storing information on whether or not a big hit state occurs may be provided separately from the winning random number storage area for the execution area of each special variable holding area and each holding area. Separately from the area, an execution area of the special variable holding area and a storage area corresponding to each holding area may be provided, and information on whether or not a big hit state occurs in the storage area may be stored. In addition to the winning type random number storage area that stores the value of the mode determination counter C2, a storage area that stores the jackpot type may be provided, or the reach random number storage area that stores the value of the variation selection counter C3; Separately, a storage area for storing reach information may be provided.

  (J) In the above embodiment, the shift process for shifting the information stored in the reserved area of the special variable reserved area and the shift process for shifting the information stored in the reserved area of the reserved information storage area are performed. However, the present invention is not particularly limited to such a configuration, and it is sufficient that the variable display can be performed in the order of winning in the winning ports 33a and 33b.

  (K) In the second embodiment, the grouping of the values (winning correspondence values) stored in the success / failure determination table is not particularly limited. For example, the winning correspondence values are grouped into 10 groups of 2 each. It is good also as dividing. Further, there may be one winning correspondence value belonging to the group.

  In the above embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the winning lottery in the high probability state (“7-16, 307 to 316”) is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the winning lottery in the low probability state. Although all the values are included, it is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the winning lottery in the high probability state (for example, “7-16, 307 to 316”) and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the winning lottery in the low probability state (for example, “0, 1”) may be different from each other, or in the high probability state, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 won in the winning lottery (for example, “7-16, 307-316”) and the low probability state The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 (for example, “7, 306”) won in the winning / losing lottery may be partially overlapped. In addition, as in the second embodiment described above, when the success / failure determination table is shared, the success / failure determination table can be simplified by duplicating at least part of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 to be won in each game mode. Can be achieved.

  (L) In the second embodiment, the reach random number value determination process is performed at the time of starting winning, and it is determined whether or not “continuous notice” is performed based on the results of the reach random number value determination process and the jackpot random number value determination process. However, the reach random number value determination process may be omitted. In this case, the process at the time of starting winning a prize can be reduced. However, in that case, at the time of “disengagement”, “continuous notice” will be derived at the same rate in any of the patterns of “rearward / rearward reach”, “reach other than frontward / rearward”, and “completely disengaged”. Therefore, it is desirable to perform the reach random value determination process at the time of starting winning. In addition, in the reach random number value determination process, it was only determined whether or not “rear and front-rear reach”, but in addition, it is determined whether or not “reach other than front-rear” and “rear-rear reach” and “rear-rear” It is also possible to distinguish between “reach other than” and “completely off”. In this case, if the determination information of the reach is stored in the holding area, it is possible to simplify the process of determining the reach state at the start of fluctuation as in the first embodiment.

  Furthermore, based on the fact that a game ball has entered each winning opening 33a, 33b (at the time of starting winning), a winning type determining process for determining the type of jackpot is performed, a winning type determining process, a reach random number value determining process, Whether or not to perform “continuous notice” may be determined based on the result of the jackpot random number determination process. When there are two starting ball entry means (upper winning hole 33a, lower winning hole 33b) as in the above embodiment, the game is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the winning holes 33a and 33b as much as possible. It is desirable to simplify the process (it is desirable to simplify or omit the winning type determination process and the reach random number value determination process). In other words, even when the number of processes performed based on the game balls entering the winning ports 33a and 33b is increased by one, the case where the game balls enter the upper winning port 33a and the lower winning port 33b simultaneously is considered. As a whole, two processes are added. Therefore, by simplifying the processing performed based on the game balls having entered the respective winning ports 33a and 33b, the game balls enter the upper winning port 33a and the lower winning port 33b at the same time. It is possible to simplify a series of processes that are performed when the timing of entering a ball (starting winning process timing) and the timing of starting the variable display (variable display setting process) overlap. As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent a situation in which a malfunction occurs in game control.

  (M) In the second embodiment, the address information storage area of the execution area is confirmed in the lottery determination (second determination determination process: see step S7402) in the high probability state of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 44). The winning correspondence value of the success / failure determination table belonging to the group corresponding to the address number stored in the address information is configured to determine whether or not the extracted value of the jackpot random number counter C1 matches. That is, it is programmed to refer only to the winning correspondence value of the success / failure determination table belonging to the group corresponding to the address number stored in the address information, but for example, only the winning correspondence value of the success / failure determination table belonging to any group Instead of deciding to refer to the address information, it may be programmed so that the determination with the winning correspondence value of the determination table belonging to the group corresponding to the address number stored in the address information is performed first (the order of determination is changed). Good.

  (N) You may implement as a pachinko machine of a different type from the above-mentioned embodiment. In addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a sparrow ball similar thereto may be used.

[Appendix]
The technical idea that can be grasped from the above embodiment will be described below.

  One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, whether or not a big hit state is generated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters a start ball entering means provided in a game area where a game ball launched by a launcher is guided) The result of the lottery determination is taught by performing variable display on the variable display device and stopping the variable display after a predetermined time. When winning in the winning / losing lottery, after the variable display, a big win state advantageous to the player occurs, and the player can acquire a lot of game values (prize balls) (for example, patents) Reference 1).

  Conventionally, the success / failure lottery first obtains the value of the success / failure random number counter (big hit random number counter) triggered by the entry of the game ball into the starting entry means, and stores the value of the success / failure random number counter in the holding storage area. Is done. Then, when starting the variable display, it is performed by determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter stored in the holding storage area matches a value corresponding to a predetermined winner (presence / absence determination). ing. For example, if 20 values corresponding to winning are set, “1 to 20”, whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter is “1” or whether the value of the success / failure random number counter is “2”. Whether or not, whether or not the hit is determined is performed 20 times at the maximum.

  In general, there are a plurality of holding storage areas capable of storing information related to variation display such as the value of the random number counter, and even when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means during the variation display. If there is an empty reserved storage area, the value of the random number counter is acquired and stored in the reserved storage area. Then, after the running variation display is finished, a success / failure determination (a lottery determination) is performed based on the value of the success / failure random number counter stored in the holding storage area, and a variation display corresponding to the result of the success / failure lottery is executed. Will be.

  By the way, in a plurality of continuous variable displays, for example, there is a display effect (so-called continuous notice) in which an effect display related to each other is derived (for example, a similar character is derived). When the continuous notice is given, a sense of expectation that a jackpot gaming state will occur will be maintained over a plurality of variable displays, so that the interest can be improved.

  When performing continuous notice, it is necessary to change (add information) the variable display information already stored in the hold storage area based on the variable display information newly stored in the hold storage area. is there. However, the contents of the corresponding variable display cannot be grasped simply by storing the counter value such as the value of the success / failure random number counter in the holding storage area. Therefore, for a gaming machine for which continuous notice is performed, as described above, whether or not to determine whether or not the variable display is set is determined at the start of the variable display. Even if it is memorized, it is determined whether or not it is correct.

  However, when the timing of entering the game ball into the start ball entry means and the start timing of the fluctuation display are synchronized, the determination of success / failure associated with the ball entering the start ball entry means and the start of the fluctuation display are accompanied. It becomes necessary to perform the determination of success / failure or the like almost simultaneously. Therefore, a lot of processing time is required for determining whether or not these are appropriate, and there is a possibility that the time available for other processing may be reduced. Specifically, for example, determination of success / failure associated with the start of variable display, update processing of the counter value, etc. are performed in normal processing every 4 msec, and determination of success / failure associated with entering the starting entry means is interrupted every 2 msec. In the configuration performed in the process, the time required for the interrupt process becomes longer than in the configuration in which the determination of success / failure or the like is not performed at the time when the variable display information is stored in the reserved storage area. As described above, if the timing of determination of success / failure overlaps, the normal processing cannot be performed accurately in the remaining time of the interrupt processing (for example, the counter value update processing or the like can be sufficiently performed). There is a risk that the processing performed in the interrupt processing may not be within the time of the interrupt processing (so-called “processing loss” may occur). In particular, in a gaming machine provided with a plurality (for example, two) of starting ball entering means, a game ball enters the two or more starting ball entering means at the same time, and the timing of entering the game ball and the start timing of variation display. There is a concern that the above-mentioned problem becomes even more remarkable.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and its purpose is a game in which control can be performed relatively smoothly in a configuration in which a specific effect over a plurality of variable displays is performed. Is to provide a machine.

Means 1. Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established;
Based on the detection of the condition establishment detection means, a main control means for performing a lottery determination as to whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player and generating a special gaming state when winning in the winning lottery ,
Variable display means for performing variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination,
The main control means includes
A random number generating means used for the success / failure lottery;
Winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the success / failure random number generating means,
A holding storage area having a plurality of holding areas capable of storing predetermined information used to determine the content of variable display in the variable display means,
A determination value extraction process for extracting the value of the random number generation means based on the detection of the condition establishment detection means;
A determination value storage process for storing the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process in any of the reserved storage areas;
A first success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process matches a value stored in the winning value storage means;
A result storage process for storing a result of the first success / failure determination process;
Based on the result of the first success / failure determination process (at the time when the first success / failure determination process is performed), a specific effect over a plurality of variation displays (including a variation display based on the result of the first success / failure determination process). A special effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute (specific effects for deriving effects related to each other for a plurality of continuous variable displays);
Prior to the execution of the variable display in the variable display means, a second winning / failing determination process for determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state based on the result of the first winning / failing determination process;
A gaming machine that performs a variable display setting process for setting a variable display based on a result of the second winning / failing determination process.

  According to the means 1, the reserved storage area has a plurality of reserved areas, and the predetermined information related to the setting of the variable display including the value of the validity random number generation means can be stored a plurality of times. The variable display teaching the result is suspended. Moreover, since this means is configured to determine whether or not to execute a specific effect (so-called continuous notice) over a plurality of variable displays based on the result of the first success / failure determination process, When the value is stored in the holding storage area, it is determined whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means matches the value stored in the winning value storage means.

  Now, it is necessary to perform the mode of variable display based on the result of the lottery. Therefore, when setting the variable display, it is necessary to determine the result of the success / failure lottery. However, in this means, again, whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means matches the value stored in the winning value storage means. Instead of determining whether or not the value of the random number generation means is stored in the reserved area of the reserved storage area (based on the result of the first appropriateness determination process already performed when the predetermined condition is satisfied). The result of the lottery determination is determined, and the variable display is set. For this reason, for example, compared with the case where it is determined whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation unit coincides with the value stored in the winning value storage unit when the variable display is set, the process for setting the variable display is simplified. (Efficiency) can be achieved. Therefore, for example, the timing at which the predetermined condition is satisfied (the timing of the first hit / fail determination process) and the timing at which the variable display based on the predetermined information stored in advance in the holding storage area is started (the timing of the second hit / fail determination process). ), It is possible to perform the game control accurately (with a margin for executing update processing of various random number counters without causing a processing failure).

  Whether or not to execute “continuous notice” is determined based on the result of the first success / failure determination process. That is, it is possible to change the rate at which the “continuous notice” is executed when the special gaming state occurs (winning case) and when the special gaming state does not occur (outward case). For example, “if the result of the first success / failure determination process considered in the special effect determination process indicates a match between the value of the success / failure random number generation means and the value of the winning value storage means, the success / failure random number generation means Compared to the case where the value of the winning value storage means does not match, the ratio for determining the execution of the specific effect (continuous notice) over a plurality of variable displays is set higher in the special effect determination process. Can be configured. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the rate of execution of “continuous notice” is higher in the case of winning than in the case of losing, the occurrence of a special gaming state due to the “continuous notice” being carried out The expectation for this is raised, and the “continuous notice” can surely improve the interest. As the condition establishment detection means, for example, there is a ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered a start ball entry means in which a game area to which a game ball launched by a launching device is guided can enter. It is done.

Mean 2. Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established;
Based on the detection of the condition establishment detection means, a main control means for performing a lottery determination as to whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player and generating a special gaming state when winning in the winning lottery ,
Variable display means for performing variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination,
The main control means includes
A random number generating means used for the success / failure lottery;
Winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the success / failure random number generating means,
A plurality of reserved areas capable of storing predetermined information used for determining the contents of variable display in the variable display means and a reserved storage area having one execution area;
A determination value extraction process for extracting the value of the random number generation means based on the detection of the condition establishment detection means;
A determination value storage process for storing the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process in the reserved area in which the predetermined information is not stored in the reserved storage area;
A first success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process matches a value stored in the winning value storage means;
A result storage process for storing a result of the first success / failure determination process;
A special effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect over a plurality of variable displays based on the result of the first success / failure determination process;
Prior to the execution of variable display in the variable display means, a shift process for shifting the predetermined information stored in the holding area of the holding storage area to the execution area side,
Second winning / failing determination for determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state based on a result of the first winning / failing determining process corresponding to the predetermined information stored in the execution area of the holding storage area by the shift process. Processing,
A gaming machine that performs a variable display setting process for setting a variable display based on a result of the second winning / failing determination process.

  According to the means 2, basically the same effects as those of the means 1 can be obtained.

Means 3. First condition satisfaction detecting means for detecting that the first condition is satisfied;
Second condition satisfaction detecting means for detecting that the second condition is satisfied;
In response to the respective detections by the first and second condition establishment detection means, whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player is determined, and a special gaming state is determined when winning is determined by the winning / losing lottery. Main control means to generate,
Variable display means for performing variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination,
The main control means includes
A random number generating means used for the success / failure lottery;
A winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the success / failure random number generating means as a value to be won in the winning / losing lottery,
A holding storage area capable of storing predetermined information used to determine the contents of the variable display,
The holding storage area is a plurality of holdings capable of storing predetermined information used for determining the contents of variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination performed based on the detection by the first condition satisfaction detecting means. Predetermined information used for determining the contents of the variable display for teaching the first special variable holding area having the area and the result of the lottery determination performed based on the detection by the second condition satisfaction detecting means A second special variable holding area having a plurality of holding areas that can be stored;
A determination value extraction process for extracting the value of the success / failure random number generation means, triggered by the respective detections by the first and second condition establishment detection means,
A determination value storage process for storing the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process in either the first or second special variable hold storage area;
A first success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process matches a value stored in the winning value storage means;
A result storage process for storing a result of the first success / failure determination process;
A special effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect over a plurality of variable displays based on the result of the first success / failure determination process;
Prior to the execution of the variable display in the variable display means, based on the result of the first winning / failing determination process, a second winning / failing determination process for determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state;
A gaming machine that performs a variable display setting process for setting a variable display based on a result of the second winning / failing determination process.

  According to the means 3, basically the same effects as the means 1 are obtained. Further, in this means, since there are a first condition satisfaction detecting means for detecting that the first condition is satisfied and a second condition satisfaction detecting means for detecting that the second condition is satisfied, Detection by the condition establishment detection means may be performed simultaneously. For this reason, when the timing when the detection by the two condition establishment detection means is performed at the same time (the timing of the first success / failure determination process) and the timing of starting the fluctuation display (the timing of the second success / failure determination process) overlap. In such a case, the risk that processing to be executed within a certain period of time becomes an amount that cannot be processed within a certain period of time, resulting in a processing failure. On the other hand, in the present means 2 (similar to the above-described means 1), in the second success / failure determination process, only the result of the first success / failure determination process stored in the execution area of the reserved storage area is taken into consideration (whether or not correct) Since it is not necessary to determine again whether or not the value of the random number generation means coincides with the value stored in the winning value storage means), the game control can be performed accurately (without causing a processing failure).

  By providing two condition establishment detection means, it is possible to diversify game play. That is, for example, in a configuration in which there are a plurality of types of special gaming states, the special gaming state is detected when the detection by the first condition establishment detection unit is performed and when the detection by the second condition establishment detection unit is performed. You may comprise so that the distribution ratio of the special game state classification at the time of granting may differ. As the first condition satisfaction detection means and the second condition satisfaction detection means, for example, a first start entrance ball in which a game ball moving in a game area where a game ball launched by a launching device is guided can enter. And a first entry detection means and a second entry detection means for detecting the game balls entered in the means and the second start entry means, respectively. Further, when a game ball enters the first and second starting ball entry means, the game value is paid out to the player, and when the game ball enters the second start ball entering means. The number of game values to be paid out may be larger than when a game ball enters the first start ball entry means. Further, the second starting ball entering means includes a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering means, and the game ball entering the second starting ball entering means. Opening / closing means capable of changing the state to an open state in which the ball is enabled or easy, the opening / closing means detecting a game ball by a passage detection means capable of detecting a game ball passing through a specific area of the game area It is good also as being made into an open state, when winning by the open lottery performed with an opportunity.

Means 4. First condition satisfaction detecting means for detecting that the first condition is satisfied;
Second condition satisfaction detecting means for detecting that the second condition is satisfied;
In response to the respective detections by the first and second condition establishment detection means, whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player is determined, and a special gaming state is determined when winning is determined by the winning / losing lottery. Main control means to generate,
Variable display means for performing variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination,
The main control means includes
A random number generating means used for the success / failure lottery;
A winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the success / failure random number generating means as a value to be won in the winning / losing lottery,
A holding storage area capable of storing predetermined information used to determine the contents of the variable display,
The holding storage area is a plurality of holdings capable of storing predetermined information used for determining the contents of variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination performed based on the detection by the first condition satisfaction detecting means. Predetermined information used for determining the contents of the variable display for teaching the first special variable holding area having the area and the result of the lottery determination performed based on the detection by the second condition satisfaction detecting means A second special variable holding area having a plurality of holding areas that can be stored, and one execution area;
A determination value extraction process for extracting the value of the success / failure random number generation means, triggered by the respective detections by the first and second condition establishment detection means,
Determination value storage processing for storing the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction processing in the reserved area in which the predetermined information is not stored in the first or second special variable reserved storage area When,
A first success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process matches a value stored in the winning value storage means;
A result storage process for storing a result of the first success / failure determination process;
A special effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect over a plurality of variable displays based on the result of the first success / failure determination process;
Prior to execution of variable display in the variable display means, a shift process for shifting the predetermined information stored in the holding area of the first or second special variable holding storage area to the execution area side,
Second winning / failing determination for determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state based on a result of the first winning / failing determining process corresponding to the predetermined information stored in the execution area of the holding storage area by the shift process. Processing,
A gaming machine that performs a variable display setting process for setting a variable display based on a result of the second winning / failing determination process.

  According to the means 4, basically the same effects as the means 3 are obtained.

Means 5. When the value of the success / failure random number generation means is stored in the first special fluctuation reservation area and the second special fluctuation reservation area, the value of the success / failure random number generation means stored in the second special fluctuation reservation area After all the fluctuation display based on the above is digested, the fluctuation display based on the value of the success / failure random number generation means stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is started,
The special effect determination process
As a result of the first success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted based on the detection of the first condition satisfaction detection means matches the value stored in the winning value storage means. A first special effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect over a plurality of variable displays,
As a result of the first success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted based on the detection of the second condition establishment detection means matches the value stored in the winning value storage means. And a second special effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect over a plurality of variable displays,
Regarding the first special effect determination process,
Of the holding areas of the first and second special variable holding areas, the holding area in which the result of the first winning / failing determination process is stored (the first winning / failing subject to the first special effect determining process). The first special effect determination process is executed when there are two or more in total (including the holding area in which the result of the determination process is stored),
Of the holding areas of the first and second special variable holding areas, the holding area in which the result of the first winning / failing determination process is stored (the first winning / failing subject to the first special effect determining process). If the total is less than two (including the holding area in which the result of the determination process is stored), the execution of the first special effect determination process is avoided,
Regarding the second special effect determination process,
For the two or more reserved areas of the second special variable reserved area (including the reserved area where the result of the first success / failure determination process that is the target of the second special effect determining process is stored) 1 When the result of the determination process is stored, the second special effect determination process is executed,
Of the reserved areas of the second special variation reserved area, the reserved area in which the result of the first success / failure determination process is stored (the result of the first success / failure determination process to be the target of the second special effect determination process) The gaming machine according to claim 3 or 4, wherein the execution of the second special effect determination process is avoided when there is only one (including a holding area in which is stored).

  According to the means 5, the fluctuation display based on the detection by the first condition establishment detection means (hereinafter referred to as the first fluctuation display) and the fluctuation display based on the detection by the second condition establishment detection means (hereinafter the second fluctuation display). In both cases, a “continuous notice” can be derived. For this reason, the “continuous notice” can be enjoyed in both the first and second variation displays. Further, according to this means, the “continuous notice” is not derived unless two or more variable displays are held. Therefore, even though only one variable display is held, the “continuous notice” is frequently executed, and the mode that occurs during the “continuous notice” is frequent even with a single variable display alone. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the balance of effects is lost ("continuous notice" is far from "specific effects over a plurality of variable displays").

  Also, as described in this means, when the second variation display is preferentially digested over the first variation display, for example, the second variation display hold count is “0” and the first variation display hold count. If the second variation display is suspended when the value is “1”, the number of suspensions will be “2” in total, but the first variation display that was previously suspended will be put behind the second variation display. . In other words, in such a situation, if “continuous notice” is set based on the fact that the second variable display is suspended, the “continuous notice” is originally executed, and thus the specification over multiple variable displays is performed. As a final result at the end of the performance, the first variation display is the last in spite of wanting to execute the second variation display at the end of a plurality of variation displays. There is a risk that it will not make sense. On the other hand, according to this means, unless two or more second variation displays are held, “continuous notice” is not derived in the second variation display. Therefore, the situation as described above can be avoided, and a situation where a “continuous notice” with a sense of incongruity is performed can be prevented.

Means 6. When the value of the success / failure random number generation means is stored in the first special fluctuation reservation area and the second special fluctuation reservation area, the value of the success / failure random number generation means stored in the second special fluctuation reservation area After all the fluctuation display based on the above is digested, the fluctuation display based on the value of the success / failure random number generation means stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is started,
The effect mode used for the specific effect over the plurality of variable displays is an effect mode that can be derived even when the specific effect over the multiple variable displays is not performed.
Or
Even if it is determined to execute the specific effect over the plurality of variation displays in the special effect determination process, the specific effect is derived for each variation display with respect to the corresponding multiple variation display. 6. The gaming machine according to any one of means 3 to 5, characterized by determining whether or not.

  According to the means 6, when the second condition establishment detection means detects during the “continuous notice” in the fluctuation display (first fluctuation display) based on the detection by the first condition establishment detection means, Since priority is given to the display of the fluctuation display (second fluctuation display) based on the detection by the second condition establishment detection means, there is a concern that the “continuous notice” may be interrupted. For example, in the case of deriving an aspect that is not normally derived as a continuous notice, the player must confirm that the “continuous notice” is performed in spite of the fact that the player has confirmed the execution of the “continuous notice”. There is a possibility that the mode shown may not be derived continuously in a plurality of variable displays, leading to a decrease in interest.

  In this respect, according to this means 6, since the effect mode used for “continuous notice” can be derived even by a single variable display, even if “continuous notice” is interrupted, there is no sense of incongruity, and It can be avoided.

  In addition, when the second condition establishment detection means detects while the “continuous notice” is being performed in the first fluctuation display, the “continuous notice” is also derived in the second fluctuation display based on the detection ( In this case, the second condition establishment detection means is used before the first variation display from which the “continuous notice” is derived is digested. If the detection continues, the “continuous notice” becomes very long. And, for example, if “goes out” after the end of the “continuous notice”, the “continuous notice” may cause a decrease in interest. Therefore, even when the second condition satisfaction detection means is detected while “continuous notice” is being performed in the first fluctuation display, “continuous notice” is displayed in the second fluctuation display based on the detection. It is desirable not to perform the control to be derived (it is desirable to limit the number of a plurality of variable displays for which “continuous notice” is performed to some extent).

Mean 7 Sub-control means for controlling the production based on a command from the main control means,
The sub-control unit includes a holding information storage area having a plurality of holding areas capable of storing information related to the variable display output from the main control unit,
The main control means includes
A primary output process for outputting, to the sub-control means, information related to setting of a variable display including a result of the first success / failure determination process when the first success / failure determination process is performed;
A secondary output process for outputting information on the variable display set in the variable display setting process to the sub-control means,
The sub-control means includes
A hold information storage process for storing information output during the primary output process from the main control means in the hold area in which no information is stored in the variable information storage area;
The special effect that determines whether or not to execute the specific effect over the plurality of variable displays based on information (such as a result of the first success / failure determination process) output from the main control unit during the primary output process The decision process,
Based on the information output during the secondary output process from the main control means, a fluctuation creation process for creating a fluctuation display,
The specific effect setting process for setting the specific effect in the variation display created in the variation creation process based on the result of the special effect determination process is performed. Game machines.

  According to the means 7, the processing relating to “continuous notice” is performed by the sub-control means. For this reason, the control burden of the main control means can be reduced. Further, by providing the sub-control unit with a hold information storage area for storing the predetermined information output in the primary output process, the sub-control unit can reliably grasp the variable display held. In addition, a specific effect can be reliably set for the variable display that is being held.

The following configuration may be made corresponding to the means 2 and 4. "
Sub-control means for controlling the production based on a command from the main control means, the sub-control means includes a plurality of holding areas capable of storing information relating to the variable display output from the main control means and one A holding information storage area having an execution area, wherein the main control means sends information relating to setting of a variable display including a result of the first success / failure determination process to the sub display when the first success / failure determination process is performed. A primary output process for outputting to the control means, and a secondary output process for outputting information on the fluctuation display set in the fluctuation display setting process to the sub-control means, wherein the sub-control means comprises: A hold information storage process for storing the information output during the primary output process from the main control means in the hold area in the variable information storage area where no information is stored. And determining whether or not to execute a specific effect over the plurality of variable displays based on information (such as a result of the first success / failure determination process) output from the main control means during the primary output process. When the special effect determination process and the information output during the secondary output process from the main control means are received, the information stored in the hold area of the hold information storage area is shifted to the execution area side. Sub-shift processing, variation creation processing for creating a variation display based on information output during the secondary output processing from the main control means, and the execution area of the hold information storage area by the sub-side shift processing A specific effect setting process for setting the specific effect in the variation display created in the variation creation process based on the result of the special effect determination process stored in Door may be carried out that "the.

Means 8. The sub-control means includes
Continuous production random number generating means used for continuous production lottery of whether or not to execute the specific production over the plurality of fluctuation displays;
As a value to be won in the continuous effect lottery, continuous effect winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among values that can be generated by the continuous effect random number generating means;
When winning in the continuous effect lottery, the continuous effect type random number generating means used when determining the type of the specific configuration effect to be derived for each variable display among the specific effects over the plurality of variable displays,
As a value corresponding to each of the specific configuration effects, comprising a continuous effect type determination value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values included in the continuous effect type random number generation means,
A plurality of the continuous effect winning value storage means and the continuous effect type determination value storage means are provided,
The special effect determination process
When the information output during the primary output process is received from the main control means, a continuous effect determination value extracting process for extracting each value of the continuous effect random number generating means and the continuous effect type random number generating means;
Each value of the continuous effect random number generating means and the continuous effect type random number generating means extracted in the continuous effect determination value extracting process is stored in the reserved area where no information is stored in the reserved information storage area. Continuous production information storage processing;
Based on the predetermined information output in the primary output process from the main control means, the continuous effect winning value storage means to be considered among the plurality of continuous effect winning value storage means is selected, and the continuous effect determination value extraction is performed. A continuous production success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the value of the continuous production random number generation means extracted in the process matches the value stored in the selected continuous production winning value storage means;
A continuous production result storage process for storing the result of the continuous production success / failure determination process,
The specific effect setting process includes:
When the result of the continuous production success / failure determination process indicates a match between the value of the continuous production random number generation unit and the value of the continuous production random value storage unit, the main control unit outputs the secondary output process. Based on the information, a continuous production type determination value storage unit to be considered among the plurality of continuous production type determination value storage units is selected, and the continuous production type determination value storage unit is taken into consideration, and the continuous production type is selected. A configuration effect type determination process for determining the specific configuration effect based on the value of the random number generation means;
The gaming machine according to claim 7, further comprising: a configuration effect setting process for setting the specific configuration effect to a variable display based on a result of the configuration effect type determination process.

  According to the means 8, it is possible to reliably set a specific effect over a plurality of variable displays. In addition, the specific composition effect that constitutes a part of the specific effect is set at the time of execution of each variable display in which the specific effect is performed, and further, regarding the continuous effect type determination value storage means that is considered when determining the type, Selection is made based on information output from the main control means during the secondary output processing. Therefore, it is possible to select a specific composition effect suitable for the variable display created based on the information output in the secondary output process from the main control means, and set it to the variable display. For this reason, for example, as in the case where all types of specific configuration effects to be derived to each variable display are determined at a time based on the information output in the primary output process from the main control means, It is possible to prevent a situation in which each specific configuration effect does not correspond and an uncomfortable feeling occurs. Furthermore, in order to make each variation display mode correspond to each specific configuration effect, in the special effect determination process, all information stored in the hold information storage area is determined, and a continuous notice to be derived for each variable display As in the case where all aspects are determined at once, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the processing becomes extremely complicated (the processing amount becomes enormous).

  In addition, “the sub-control unit is a continuous production random number generation unit used in continuous production lottery for determining whether or not to execute a specific production over the plurality of variable displays, and a value won in the continuous production lottery, Of the values that can be generated by the continuous effect random number generation means, the continuous effect winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value, and when winning in the continuous effect lottery, Of the values included in the continuous effect type random number generating means, the continuous effect type random number generating means used for determining the type of the specific effect that is derived for each variable display, Continuous production type determination value storage means for storing a predetermined value, and a plurality of continuous production winning value storage means and a plurality of continuous production type determination value storage means are provided. The special effect determination process extracts the values of the continuous effect random number generation means and the continuous effect type random number generation means when receiving the information output during the primary output process from the main control means. Information in the hold information storage area is stored for each value of the continuous effect random number generation means and the continuous effect type random number generation means extracted in the effect determination value extraction process and the continuous effect determination value extraction process. Based on the predetermined information output during the primary output process from the main control means and the continuous effect information storage process stored in the non-holding area, the continuous effect winning among the plurality of continuous effect winning value storage means The value storage means is selected, and the value of the continuous effect random number generation means extracted in the continuous effect determination value extraction process is the selected continuous effect. The continuous effect randomness determination process for determining whether or not the value stored in the selected value storage means matches, and the result of the continuous effect appropriateness determination process in the continuous effect random number storage process, A continuous effect result storage process for storing the continuous effect type random number generating means in the same reserved area as the reserved area, and the specific effect setting process is performed in the execution area of the reserved information storage area. When the result of the stored continuous production success / failure determination process indicates a match between the value of the continuous production random number generation unit and the value of the continuous production winning value storage unit, the main control unit performs the secondary output process. Based on the output information, a continuous production type determination value storage unit to be considered among the plurality of continuous production type determination value storage units is selected, and the selected continuous production type determination unit is selected. Considering a fixed value storage means, based on the value of the continuous effect type random number generation means stored in the execution area, the result of the composition effect type determination process for determining the specific composition effect, and the result of the composition effect type determination process And a configuration effect setting process for setting the specific configuration effect to a variable display ”.

Means 9. There are at least two gaming modes with different winning probabilities of the winning / losing lottery, and the gaming mode can be switched between before the special gaming state occurs and after the special gaming state ends,
The main control means includes
A mode type random number generating means used in determining the type of the game mode given after the end of the special game state;
A mode type determination value storage unit that stores a predetermined value among the values included in the mode type random number generation unit as a value corresponding to each game mode;
A plurality of the winning value storage means are provided corresponding to the respective game modes,
During the determination value extraction process, the value of the mode type random number generation means is also extracted,
During the determination value storage process, the extracted value of the mode type random number generation means is also stored,
The first success / failure determination process selects a winning value storage means corresponding to a game mode from the plurality of winning value storage means, and the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process is: It is determined whether or not it matches the value stored in the selected winning value storage means,
At least in the case where the result of the first success / failure determination process indicates a match between the value of the success / failure random number generation means and the value of the winning value storage means, the mode type determination value storage means is referred to and the determination value extraction process is performed. Performing a first mode type determination process for determining the type of game mode based on the value of the mode type random number generation means extracted
During the result storage process, the result of the first mode type determination process is also stored,
Prior to the execution of the variable display in the variable display means, a second mode type determination process for determining the type of game mode to be given after the end of the special gaming state is performed based on the result of the first mode type determination process. ,
The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8, wherein the variation display setting process is performed based on the results of the second success / failure determination process and the second mode type determination process.

  According to the means 9, in the second mode type determination process, only the result of the first mode type determination process is considered, and the mode type determination value storage means is referred again, and the value of the mode type random number generation means is determined. It is not necessary to perform processing such as determining which game mode the value corresponds to. For this reason, simplification of processing can be achieved.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of game modes having different winning probabilities of winning / failing lots as in the means 9, the first timing when the value of the winning / randomizing number generating means is stored in the holding storage area and the holding storage area. The game mode may be different from the second timing for starting the variable display based on the stored value of the random number generation means. For this reason, a situation may occur in which the determination result of whether or not the first determination process is performed at the first timing is inaccurate at the second timing. That is, for example, the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process corresponds to a loss at the first timing, but may correspond to a winning at the second timing, or the first timing. Then, it corresponds to winning, but at the second timing, it may correspond to a miss.

  In contrast, as described in the above means 1 to 4, even when the first success / failure determination process is performed at the timing (first timing) when the value of the acceptance random number generation means is stored in the holding storage area. By performing the second winning / failing determination process at the timing (second timing) at which the variable display is started, it is possible to perform an accurate winning / failing determination adapted to the game mode at the second timing. Therefore, although the special gaming state is supposed to be granted (though it is a hit), the right cannot be obtained (becomes missed), or the special gaming state cannot be given (although it is missed) , It is possible to prevent such a situation that the right is obtained (winning).

  In the case of a configuration in which the result of the first / failure determination process is directly reflected in the variation display, the first success / failure determination process is performed in the second game mode with a high probability of winning in the winner / lottery lottery. When the variable display corresponding to the result of the 1-win determination process is executed in the first game mode having a lower probability of winning than the second mode, the variable display is executed in the first game mode. Nevertheless, since the winning / losing lottery is performed with the probability of the second game mode, the probability of winning is increased. Regarding the gaming machine having such a configuration, it is advantageous to hold the variable display as much as possible in the second gaming mode, and a player who does not know this may suffer a significant loss. On the other hand, according to the present means, the determination of success / failure is made only at the start of the variable display. For this reason, even in the first game mode, it is possible to avoid a situation where the success / failure is determined by the winning probability of the second game mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which significant unfairness occurs due to a difference in player knowledge. In addition, by determining whether or not to win at the start of the variable display, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the success or failure is determined with the winning probability of the first game mode even in the second game mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the loss of the player due to the fact that the winning / failing lottery cannot be received with an appropriate probability.

  In correspondence with the means 7, “the result of the first mode type determination process may also be output during the primary output process”. In addition, it is good also as "the ratio which determines execution of the specific effect (continuous advance notice) over a several times variable display in the special effect determination process changes with the result of the said 1st mode classification determination process." For example, “in the case where the result of the first mode type determination process indicates the grant of the second game mode, the variable effect display is performed a plurality of times in the special effect determination process compared to the case where the grant of the first mode is indicated. It is good also as that the ratio which determines execution of the specific production (continuous notice) over is set high.

  Further, in the means 8, the type of the specific configuration effect derived to each variable display among the specific effects over the plurality of variable displays is determined at a time based on the predetermined information output in the primary output process from the main control means. It is not determined entirely, but is determined for each variation display based on information output during the secondary output process from the main control means. For this reason, a specific composition production | presentation can be determined according to the content of each fluctuation | variation display. Therefore, as described above, based on the predetermined information determined to be out of the first winning / nothing determination process, a variable display that teaches the occurrence of the special gaming state is executed, or the winning determination is determined in the first winning / nothing determination process. When a variable display that teaches that a special gaming state does not occur is executed based on the information that has been made, a situation in which the type of specific configuration effect corresponding to the determination in the first winning / failing determination process is selected is avoided. can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the variation display mode does not correspond to the specific configuration effect and a sense of discomfort occurs. In particular, as a mode of specific effects over a plurality of variable displays, a mode that can be derived only when a special game state occurs is derived in a variable display that teaches that a special game state does not occur (becomes off). If this happens, the player may feel uncomfortable and cause a significant decrease in interest, but this means can avoid this.

Means 10. A first game mode (low probability state) in which the winning / losing lottery is performed with a first probability predetermined as a probability of winning the special gaming state;
A configuration in which there is a second game mode (high probability state) in which the success / failure lottery is performed with a second probability that the probability of winning the special gaming state is higher than the first probability,
The winning value storage means
First winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values included in the winning random number generating means as a value to be won in the winning lottery in the first game mode;
Second winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values included in the success / failure random number generation means as a value to be won in the winning / notifying lottery in the second game mode;
In the first winning / nothing determination process, in both the first and second gaming modes, the value of the winning / random number generating means extracted in the determination value extraction process is stored in the first winning value storage. It is determined whether or not the value matches the value stored in the means, and the value of the success / failure random number extraction means extracted in the determination value extraction process matches the value stored in the second winning value storage means 10. The gaming machine according to means 9, wherein it is determined whether or not to do so.

  According to the means 10, the second timing for starting the variable display based on the first timing at which the value of the winning random number generating means is stored in the reserved storage area and the value of the success / failure random number generating means stored in the reserved storage area. Even in the case where the game mode differs depending on the timing of the second, in the second win / fail determination process, it is determined again whether or not the value of the pass / fail random number generation means matches the value of the win value storage means You don't have to.

  Specifically, as described in the means 9, for example, when the result of the first success / failure determination process performed in the first mode indicates a mismatch between the value of the success / failure random number generation means and the value of the winning value storage means ( Even if the first winning / failing determination process is performed in the second mode (if the winning value storage means to be considered is the second winning value storage means). The second success / failure determination process corresponding to the result of the first success / failure determination process is a case where the value of the success / failure random number generation means matches the value of the winning value storage means (when winning is indicated). In the case of being performed in the second mode, a special gaming state is generated in the second success / failure determination process.

  In the case of adopting such a configuration, for example, whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means matches the value of the first winning value storage means in the first success / failure determination process performed in the first mode. If the second determination process corresponding to the result of the first determination process is performed in the second mode, the determination is made again in the second determination process. It becomes necessary to perform a process of determining whether or not the value of the random number generation means matches the value of the winning value storage means.

  On the other hand, according to this means, in both the first and second game modes, the value of the success / failure random number generation means and the value of the first winning value storage means are determined in the first success / failure determination process. In addition to determining whether or not they match, it is also determined whether or not the value of the winning random number generation means matches the value of the second winning value storage means. For this reason, as a result of the first success / failure determination process for the reserved storage area, for example, information that can be recognized as “winning” in the second game mode but “winning” in the first game mode, It is possible to store information that allows the user to grasp that the game mode is “out” in the first game mode but “winning” in the second mode. Therefore, even if the second winning / nothing determination process is executed in a game mode different from the corresponding first winning / nothing determination process, the special gaming state is generated only by taking into consideration the result of the first winning / failing determination process. Whether or not (whether or not) can be accurately determined according to the game mode at that time. As a result, in the second success / failure determination process, it is not necessary to perform again the process of determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means matches the value of the winning value storage means, thereby simplifying the process. be able to.

Means 11. A first game mode (low probability state) in which the winning / losing lottery is performed with a first probability predetermined as a probability of winning the special gaming state;
A configuration in which there is a second game mode (high probability state) in which the success / failure lottery is performed with a second probability that the probability of winning the special gaming state is higher than the first probability,
The value of the success / failure random number generation means that is won in the second game mode includes a value that is won in the first game mode,
The winning value storage means
A first winning value that stores a predetermined value among the values included in the random number generation means as the value to be won in the winning lottery in both the first and second gaming modes. Storage means;
As a value that is won in the success / failure lottery only in the second game mode and not won in the success / failure lottery in the first game mode, a predetermined value among the values included in the success / failure random number generator is set. A second winning value storage means for storing,
In the primary determination process, in both the first and second game modes, the value of the success / failure random number extraction means extracted in the determination value extraction process is stored in the first winning value storage means. It is determined whether or not the value matches the stored value, and whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process matches the value stored in the second winning value storage means 11. The gaming machine according to means 9 or 10, characterized by determining whether or not.

  According to the means 11, the same operational effects as the means 10 are basically obtained. In addition, among the values corresponding to the winning in the first game mode and the values corresponding to the winning in the second gaming mode, the value of the success / failure random number generation means and the winning value storage are used for the overlapping values. It is not necessary to determine whether or not the value of the means matches twice in the first hit / fail determination process. For this reason, in the first success / failure determination process, it is possible to reduce the number of processes such as determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means matches the value of the winning value storage means, thereby simplifying the control. Can do. For example, in the case where the value to be won in the first mode is “2” and the value to be won in the second mode is “5” among the values of the random number generating means, for example, it is won in the first game mode. In the configuration in which the value of the success / failure random number generation means and the value of the success / failure random number generation means selected in the second game mode are all different, it is necessary to perform 7 determinations for each first success / failure determination process. With the configuration of the means 11, it is only necessary to make five determinations for each first determination result.

  Means 12. The first mode type determination process includes not only the case where the result of the first success / failure determination process indicates a match between the value of the success / failure random number generation means and the value of the winning value storage means. Even when the result indicates a mismatch between the value of the success / failure random number generation means and the value of the winning value storage means, in the case where it can be determined in the second success / failure determination process to generate a special gaming state The gaming machine according to any one of means 9 to 11, which is executed.

  According to the means 12, the first mode type determination process is performed when it can be determined as “winning” in the second winning / failing determination process even if it is determined as “miss” in the first winning / failing determination process. It has become the composition which goes. For this reason, for example, even if it is determined as “disconnected” in the first determination process, the first mode is determined as “winning” in the second determination process corresponding to the primary determination process. By considering the result of the type determination process, it is possible to determine the type of game mode given after the end of the special game state (perform the second mode type determination process). Therefore, in the second mode type determination process, it is not necessary to perform a process of determining whether the value of the mode type random number generation means matches with the value of the mode type determination value storage means, and the variable display is started. It is possible to simplify the processing when performing. Thereby, for example, the detection display by the condition establishment detection means (the timing of the first success / failure determination process and the first mode type determination process) and the variable display based on the predetermined information stored in advance in the reserved storage area are started. Even when the timing (the timing of the second win / fail determination process and the second mode type determination process) overlaps, the game control can be performed relatively smoothly.

  It should be noted that “the first mode type determination process is performed regardless of the result of the first success / failure determination process”. In this case, the same effect as that of the means 12 is obtained. However, when the configuration is adopted, the first mode type determination process is performed in any game mode, and the amount of processing when the detection by the condition establishment detection unit is performed is large. It will increase. For this reason, as in the above-described means 12, when it is determined as “winning” in the first winning / failing determination process, it is determined as “out” in the first winning / failing determination process, and the subsequent second winning / failing determination process. It is desirable to perform the first mode type determination process only when it can be determined as “winning”.

Means 13. A variable entry means that is configured to be switchable between an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter, and in which a game value is paid out when the game ball enters. The variable pitching means is configured to be opened only in a special gaming state,
The special game state includes a first special game state in which a predetermined number of game values can be paid out (acquired) during the special game state, and a game value payout (acquisition) greater than the predetermined number during the special game state. A configuration with a second special gaming state that can be desired,
The main control means includes
Winning type random number generating means used in determining the type of special gaming state;
As a value corresponding to the type of each special gaming state, the winning type determination value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the winning type random number generation means,
In the determination value extraction process, the value of the winning type random number generation means is also extracted,
During the determination value storage process, the extracted value of the winning type random number generation means is also stored in the holding area,
At least in the case where the result of the first success / failure determination process indicates a match between the value of the success / failure random number generation means and the value of the winning value storage means, the winning type determination value storage means is referred to and the determination value extraction process Based on the value of the extracted winning type random number generation means, a first winning type determination process for determining the type of special gaming state,
During the result storage process, the result of the first winning type determination process is also stored,
Prior to the execution of the variable display in the variable display means, based on the result of the first winning type determination process, a second winning type determination process for determining which type the special gaming state type is,
The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 12, characterized in that the variable display setting process is performed based on the results of the second win / fail determination process and the second win type determination process.

  According to the means 13, in the second winning type determination process, only the result of the first winning type determination process is taken into consideration, the winning type determination value storage means is taken into consideration again, and the value of the winning type random number generating means is determined. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as determining which special gaming state type corresponds to the value. For this reason, simplification of processing can be achieved.

  The game mode described in the means 9 to 12 is associated with the special game state type of the means 13, and the process related to the determination of the game mode and the process related to the determination of the special game state type are common. It is also possible to make it easier. For example, the second special gaming state is given, and after the second special gaming state is finished, the first pattern in which the first gaming mode is given (so-called normal jackpot) and the second special gaming state are given. In addition, after the end of the second special gaming state, a second pattern (so-called probable big hit) to which the second gaming mode is given, a first special gaming state, and the first special gaming state are given. After the end of, a third pattern to which the second game mode is given (“special probability change” in the above embodiment) may be set. In this case, the process can be simplified compared to the case where the process related to the determination of the game mode and the process related to the determination of the special game state type are performed separately.

  In correspondence with the means 7, “the result of the first winning type determination process may also be output during the primary output process”. In addition, it is good also as "the ratio which determines execution of the specific effect (continuous advance notice) over a several times variable display in the special effect determination process changes with the result of the said 1st winning classification determination process." For example, “when the result of the first winning type determination process indicates the provision of the second special gaming state, the special effect determination process performs a plurality of times compared to the case of the provision of the first special gaming state. It is good also as "the ratio which determines execution of the specific production (continuous advance notice) over a variable display is set high."

  Means 14. The first winning type determination process includes not only the case where the result of the first winning / non-winning determination process indicates a match between the value of the winning / random number generating means and the value of the winning value storage means. Even if the result indicates a mismatch between the value of the winning random number generation means and the value of the winning value storage means, in the case where it can be determined that the special gaming state is generated in the second winning / failing determination process 14. The gaming machine according to means 13, which is executed.

  According to the means 14, even if it is determined as “disconnected” in the first winning / failing determination process, if it can be determined as “winning” in the second winning / failing determination process, the first winning type determination process is performed. It has become the composition which goes. For this reason, for example, even if it is determined as “disconnected” in the first winning / failing determination process, but is determined as “winning” in the second winning / failing determination process corresponding to the first winning / failing determination process, By considering the result of the first winning type determination process stored in the area, it is possible to determine the type of the special gaming state (perform the second winning type determination process). Therefore, in the second winning type determination process, it is not necessary to perform a process of determining whether the value of the winning type random number generation means matches with the value of the winning type determination value storage means, and the variable display is started. It is possible to simplify the processing when performing. Thereby, for example, the timing based on the detection by the condition establishment detection means (the timing of the first winning / failing determination process and the first winning type determination process) and the variation based on the predetermined information stored in advance in the holding storage area Even when the timing for starting the display (the timing of the second winning / failing determination process and the second winning type determination process) overlaps, the game control can be performed relatively smoothly.

  It should be noted that “the first winning type determination process is performed regardless of the result of the first winning / failing determination process”. In this case, the same effect as that of the means 14 is obtained. However, when the configuration is adopted, the first winning type determination process is performed in any game mode, and the processing amount when the detection by the condition establishment detection unit is performed is large. It will increase. For this reason, as in the above-described means 14, when it is determined as “winning” in the first winning / failing determination process, it is determined as “out” in the first winning / failing determination process, and the subsequent second winning / failing determination process. It is desirable to perform the first winning type determination process only when it can be determined as “winning”.

Means 15. When the variable display means performs a variable display indicating that the winning lottery has been won, a reach state in which a specific mode is derived in the variable display means occurs before the result is displayed. In addition, the reach state can occur even when the variable display means performs a variable display indicating that the winning lottery is not won,
The main control means includes
Reach random number generating means used for determining whether to generate a reach state;
Reach determination value storage means for storing a predetermined value among values that can be generated by the reach random number generation means as a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach state,
During the determination value extraction process, the value of the reach random number generation means is also extracted,
In the determination value storing process, the extracted value of the reach random number generation means is also stored,
In the case where at least the result of the first success / failure determination process indicates a mismatch between the value of the success / failure random number generation means and the value of the winning value storage means, the reach determination value storage means is taken into consideration and the extraction is performed in the determination value extraction process Performing a first reach determination process for determining whether a reach state occurs based on the value of the reach random number generation means
During the result storage process, the result of the first reach determination process is also stored,
Prior to the execution of the variable display in the variable display means, based on the result of the first reach determination process, performs a second reach determination process to determine whether to generate a reach state,
The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 14, wherein the variation display setting process is performed based on a result of the second success / failure determination process and the second reach determination process.

  According to the means 15, in the final reach type determination process, only the result of the primary reach type determination process is taken into consideration, and the reach type determination table is referred again, and the value of the reach type random number counter generates a reach state. It is not necessary to perform a process of determining whether or not the value matches. For this reason, simplification of processing can be achieved.

  It should be noted that “the plurality of types having different modes when the variable display is stopped” exists in the reach state. In this case, in the first reach determination process, not only whether or not the reach state is generated, but also the type of reach state is determined, and whether or not the reach state is generated in the second reach determination process. In addition to determining, the type of reach state is determined.

  In correspondence with the means 7, “the result of the first reach determination process may also be output during the primary output process”. In addition, it is good also as "the ratio which determines execution of the specific effect (continuous advance notice) over a several times variable display in the special effect determination process changes with the result of the said 1st reach determination process." For example, “when the result of the first reach determination process indicates the occurrence of a reach state, compared to the case where the reach state does not occur, the specific effect (continuous The ratio for determining the execution of the (notice) may be set high.

  Means 16. The first reach determination process includes not only the case where the result of the first success / failure determination process indicates a mismatch between the value of the success / failure random number generation means and the value of the winning value storage means, but also the result of the first success / failure determination process. Is executed when it is determined that the special game state is not to be generated in the second success / failure determination process even when the value of the success / failure random number generation means and the value of the winning value storage means are coincident. The gaming machine according to claim 15, wherein

  According to the means 16, even if it is determined as “winning” in the first winning / failing determination process, if it can be determined as “disconnected” in the second winning / failing determination process, the first reach determination process is performed. It is configured to go. For this reason, for example, although it is determined as “winning” in the first determination process, even if it is determined as “out” in the second determination process corresponding to the primary determination process, The occurrence of the reach state can be determined (the second reach determination process is performed) by referring to the stored result of the first reach determination process. Therefore, in the second reach determination process, it is not necessary to perform a process of determining whether the value of the reach random number generation means matches with the value of the reach determination value storage means. Processing can be simplified. Thereby, for example, the timing of the detection by the condition establishment detection means (the timing of the first win / fail determination process and the first reach determination process) and the variable display based on the predetermined information stored in advance in the holding storage area Even when the timing of starting the game (the timing of the second winning / failing determination process and the second reach determination process) overlaps, the game control can be performed relatively smoothly.

  Note that “the first reach determination process may be performed regardless of the result of the first hit / fail determination process”. Also in this case, the same effect as the means 16 can be obtained. However, when this configuration is adopted, the first reach determination process is performed in any game mode, and the amount of processing when the condition establishment detection means is performed increases. End up. For this reason, as in the above-described means 16, when it is determined to be “off” in the first winning / failing determination process, it is determined to be “winning” in the first winning / failing determination process, and the subsequent second winning / failing determination process. It is desirable to perform the first reach determination process only when it can be determined as “disconnected”.

Means 17. Each of the reserved areas (and the execution area) of the reserved storage area includes a corresponding random number storage area for storing the value of the corresponding random number generation means,
In the determination value storage process, the value of the success / failure random number generation means is stored in the success / failure random number storage area,
The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 16, wherein in the result storage process, the result of the first success / failure determination process is overwritten in the success / failure random number storage area.

  According to the means 17, the configuration can be simplified as compared with the case where a storage area for storing the result of the first success / failure determination process is provided separately from the success / failure random number storage area. Note that “the random number storage area uses 2 bytes, and the bit pattern for 16 bits differs depending on whether the winning lottery is won or not”. In this case, due to the fact that the determination result of the success / failure lottery is rewritten due to noise or the like, it is determined that the first winner / failure determination process is not a winner, but the second winner / rejection determination process determines that it is a winner, It is possible to suppress a situation in which it is determined that the winning is determined in the first winning / failing determination process but is not determined in the second winning / failing determination process.

  Incidentally, in correspondence with the means 9 to 12, “each reserved area (and the execution area) of the reserved storage area includes a mode type random number storage area for storing the value of the mode type random number generating means, In the determination value storage process, the value of the mode type random number generation means is stored in the mode type random number storage area. In the result storage process, the result of the first mode type determination process is stored in the mode type random number storage area. May be overwritten ". Corresponding to the means 13 and 14, “each holding area (and the execution area) of the holding storage area includes a winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the winning type random number generation unit, In the determination value storing process, the value of the winning type random number generating means is stored in the winning type random number storage area, and in the result storing process, the result of the first winning type determining process is stored in the winning type random number storage area. May be overwritten ". Further, in correspondence with the means 15 and 16, “each reserved area (and the execution area) of the reserved storage area includes a reach random number storage area for storing the value of the reach random number generating means, and the determination In the value storage process, the value of the reach random number generation means is stored in the reach random number storage area, and in the result storage process, the result of the first reach determination process is overwritten in the reach random number storage area. It is good. When these configurations are employed, the function and effect of the means 17 such as simplification of the configuration can be achieved more reliably.

Means 18. Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established;
Main control means for generating a special gaming state when winning in the winning lottery and performing a lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on detection by the condition establishment detecting means;
Variable display means for performing variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination,
The main control means includes
Fluctuation setting random number generation means (pass / fail random number generation means, mode type random number generation means, winning type random number generation means) used for the setting of the fluctuation display (said lottery determination, mode determination, special game state type determination, reach determination) , Reach random number generation means),
Fluctuation setting determination value storage means (a winning value storage means, a mode type determination value storage means, a winning type random number generation means, which associates a value of the fluctuation setting random number generation means with each of a plurality of fluctuation display modes set. Reach determination value storage means),
A plurality of holding areas capable of storing predetermined information used to determine the contents of the variable display and a holding storage area having one execution area;
A determination value extraction process for extracting the value of the fluctuation setting random number generation means based on the detection by the condition establishment detection means;
A determination value storage process for storing the value of the variation setting random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process in the reserved area in which the predetermined information is not stored in the reserved storage area;
A first determination process (first success / failure determination) for determining a variation display mode to be selected based on the value of the fluctuation setting random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process in consideration of the fluctuation setting determination value storage means. Determination process, first mode type determination process, first winning type determination process, first reach determination process),
A result storage process for storing the result of the first determination process in the holding area in which the value of the variation setting random number generation means is stored in the determination value storage process;
Based on the result of the first determination process, a special effect determination process for determining whether to execute a specific effect over a plurality of variable displays;
Prior to the execution of the variable display, a shift process for shifting the predetermined information stored in the holding area of the holding storage area to the execution area side,
Based on the result of the first determination process stored in the execution area of the holding storage area by the shift process, a second determination process (second determination determination process, second determination process) for determining the mode (content) of the variable display Mode type determination process, second winning type determination process, second reach determination process),
A gaming machine that performs a variable display setting process for setting a variable display based on a result of the second determination process.

  Note that the result of the first win / fail determination process is not necessarily required in the special effect determination process, and is based on at least one of the results of the first mode type determination process, the first winning type determination process, and the first reach determination process. Special effect determination processing may be performed.

Means 19. Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established;
Based on the detection of the condition establishment detection means, a main control means for performing a lottery determination as to whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player and generating a special gaming state when winning in the winning lottery ,
Variable display means for performing variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination,
The main control means includes
A random number generating means used for the success / failure lottery;
Winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the success / failure random number generating means as the winning corresponding value to be won in the winning / losing lottery,
A holding storage area having a plurality of holding areas capable of storing predetermined information used to determine the content of variable display in the variable display means,
The winning correspondence values stored in the winning value storage means are grouped in advance, and the winning value storage means is set with identification information for identifying each group,
A determination value extraction process for extracting the value of the random number generation means based on the detection of the condition establishment detection means;
A determination value storage process for storing the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process in any of the reserved storage areas;
A first success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process matches a winning correspondence value stored in the winning value storage means;
At least in the first success / failure determination process, when it is determined that the value of the success / failure random number generation means matches the value corresponding to the winning correspondence, the winning correspondence value that matches the value of the success / failure random number generation means belongs to the group A group information storing process for storing the corresponding identification information;
A special effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect over a plurality of variable displays based on the result of the first success / failure determination process;
Prior to execution of variable display in the variable display means, among the winning correspondence values stored in the winning value storage means, (at least first) a group corresponding to the identification information stored in the group information storage processing. It is determined whether or not the winning correspondence value to which the value corresponds to the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process, and whether or not to generate a special gaming state based on the determination result A second success / failure determination process for determining
A gaming machine that performs a variable display setting process for setting a variable display based on a result of the second winning / failing determination process.

  According to the means 19, the reserved storage area has a plurality of reserved areas, and the predetermined information relating to the setting of the variable display including the value of the validity random number generation means can be stored a plurality of times. The variable display teaching the result is suspended. Moreover, since this means is configured to determine whether or not to execute a specific effect (so-called continuous notice) over a plurality of variable displays based on the result of the first success / failure determination process, When the value is stored in the holding storage area, it is determined whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means matches the value stored in the winning value storage means.

  Now, it is necessary to perform the mode of variable display based on the result of the lottery. Therefore, when setting the variable display, it is necessary to determine the result of the success / failure lottery (perform the second success / failure determination process). For example, if the winning correspondence value stored in the winning value storage means is “1 to 20”, the determination in the first and second determination processing is the winning random number extracted in the determination value extraction processing. In the case where the value of the generation means is “1”, “2”, “3”, etc., etc. When the value of the means is “1”, the determination need only be performed once, but the value of the random number generation means is “20” or a value other than “1-20”. The above determination must be made 20 times. And the timing at which the predetermined condition is satisfied (timing of the first winning / failing determination process), the timing of starting the variable display based on the predetermined information stored in advance in the holding storage area (timing of the second winning / failing determination process), If there is an overlap, it becomes necessary to make the determination at most 40 times at the same time, which may cause trouble in game control.

  On the other hand, according to the means 19, the second success / failure determination process includes (at least first) a group information storage process in which the value of the success / failure random number generation means is stored in the grouped winning value storage means. This is done by determining whether or not it matches the winning correspondence value belonging to the group corresponding to the identification information stored in. That is, for example, when the value stored in the winning value storage means is “1 to 20” and these values are divided into five groups of four, the maximum in the second winning / failing determination process. During the four determinations, it is determined that the extracted value of the random number generation means matches the winning corresponding value. For this reason, the determination need only be performed four times at maximum. Therefore, the maximum number of times of the determination in the second success / failure determination process can be greatly reduced, and the process for setting the variable display can be simplified (efficient). As a result, even when the timing of the first success / failure determination process overlaps with the timing of the second success / failure determination process, the game control is performed accurately (various random number counter update processing is performed without causing processing failure). Can be done).

  According to the present means, in the second success / failure determination process, whether or not the determination is made based on the result of the first success / failure determination process performed in advance is performed, but the generation of the random number of the success / failure extracted in the determination value extraction process is performed. It is possible to determine whether or not the game is successful by directly comparing the value of the means and the winning correspondence value stored in the winning value storage means.

  Note that the second success / failure determination process may have a program configuration (see the group corresponding to the identification information) that only determines the winning correspondence value belonging to the group corresponding to the identification information stored in the group information storage process. And a program configuration (identification state) in which the order of determination is changed so that the determination is made first with respect to the winning corresponding value belonging to the group corresponding to the identification information stored in the group information storing process. The determination process may be started from a group corresponding to In the case of adopting the former configuration, “in the second success / failure determination process, the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process is stored in the winning value storage means. Among the values, it is determined whether or not it matches only with the winning correspondence value belonging to the group corresponding to the identification information stored in the group information storage process, and a special gaming state is generated based on the determination result It is good also as deciding whether to make it go. "

  Whether or not to execute “continuous notice” is determined based on the result of the first success / failure determination process. That is, it is possible to change the rate at which the “continuous notice” is executed when the special gaming state occurs (winning case) and when the special gaming state does not occur (outward case). For example, “if the result of the first success / failure determination process considered in the special effect determination process indicates a match between the value of the success / failure random number generation means and the value of the winning value storage means, the success / failure random number generation means Compared to the case where the value of the winning value storage means does not match, the ratio for determining the execution of the specific effect (continuous notice) over a plurality of variable displays is set higher in the special effect determination process. Can be configured. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the rate of execution of “continuous notice” is higher in the case of winning than in the case of losing, the occurrence of a special gaming state due to the “continuous notice” being carried out The expectation for this is raised, and the “continuous notice” can surely improve the interest. As the condition establishment detection means, for example, there is a ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered a start ball entry means in which a game area to which a game ball launched by a launching device is guided can enter. It is done.

Means 20. Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established;
Based on the detection of the condition establishment detection means, a main control means for performing a lottery determination as to whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player and generating a special gaming state when winning in the winning lottery ,
Variable display means for performing variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination,
The main control means includes
A random number generating means used for the success / failure lottery;
Winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the success / failure random number generating means as the winning corresponding value to be won in the winning / losing lottery,
A plurality of reserved areas capable of storing predetermined information used for determining the contents of variable display in the variable display means and a reserved storage area having one execution area;
The winning correspondence values stored in the winning value storage means are grouped in advance, and the winning value storage means is set with identification information for identifying each group,
A determination value extraction process for extracting the value of the random number generation means based on the detection of the condition establishment detection means;
A determination value storage process for storing the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process in the reserved area in which the predetermined information is not stored in the reserved storage area;
A first success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process matches a winning correspondence value stored in the winning value storage means;
At least in the first success / failure determination process, when it is determined that the value of the success / failure random number generation means matches the value corresponding to the winning correspondence, the winning correspondence value that matches the value of the success / failure random number generation means belongs to the group A group information storing process for storing the corresponding identification information;
A special effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect over a plurality of variable displays based on the result of the first success / failure determination process;
Prior to the execution of variable display in the variable display means, a shift process for shifting the predetermined information stored in the holding area of the holding storage area to the execution area side,
Of the winning correspondence values stored in the winning value storage means, (at least first) the group corresponding to the identification information corresponding to the predetermined information stored in the execution area of the holding storage area by the shift process It is determined whether or not the winning correspondence value belonging to the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process matches, and based on the determination result, the first success / failure determination process A second win / fail determination process for determining whether to generate a special gaming state based on the result;
A gaming machine that performs a variable display setting process for setting a variable display based on a result of the second winning / failing determination process.

  According to the means 20, the same operation effect as the means 19 is obtained basically.

Means 21. First condition satisfaction detecting means for detecting that the first condition is satisfied;
Second condition satisfaction detecting means for detecting that the second condition is satisfied;
In response to the respective detections by the first and second condition establishment detection means, whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player is determined, and a special gaming state is determined when winning is determined by the winning / losing lottery. Main control means to generate,
Variable display means for performing variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination,
The main control means includes
A random number generating means used for the success / failure lottery;
Winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the success / failure random number generating means, as winning corresponding values to be won in the winning / losing lottery,
A holding storage area capable of storing predetermined information used to determine the contents of the variable display,
The winning correspondence values stored in the winning value storage means are grouped in advance, and the winning value storage means is set with identification information for identifying each group,
The holding storage area is a plurality of holdings capable of storing predetermined information used for determining the contents of variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination performed based on the detection by the first condition satisfaction detecting means. Predetermined information used for determining the contents of the variable display for teaching the first special variable holding area having the area and the result of the lottery determination performed based on the detection by the second condition satisfaction detecting means A second special variable holding area having a plurality of holding areas that can be stored;
A determination value extraction process for extracting the value of the success / failure random number generation means, triggered by the respective detections by the first and second condition establishment detection means,
A determination value storage process for storing the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process in either the first or second special variable hold storage area;
A first success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process matches a winning correspondence value stored in the winning value storage means;
At least in the first success / failure determination process, when it is determined that the value of the success / failure random number generation means matches the value corresponding to the winning correspondence, the winning correspondence value that matches the value of the success / failure random number generation means belongs to the group A group information storing process for storing the corresponding identification information;
A special effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect over a plurality of variable displays based on the result of the first success / failure determination process;
Prior to execution of variable display in the variable display means, among the winning correspondence values stored in the winning value storage means, (at least first) a group corresponding to the identification information stored in the group information storage processing. Whether to determine whether the winning correspondence value that belongs and the value of the success / failure random number extraction means extracted in the determination value extraction process match, and to generate a special gaming state based on the determination result A second success / failure determination process for determining whether or not;
A gaming machine that performs a variable display setting process for setting a variable display based on a result of the second winning / failing determination process.

  According to the means 21, the same effects as those of the means 19 are basically obtained. Further, in this means, since there are a first condition satisfaction detecting means for detecting that the first condition is satisfied and a second condition satisfaction detecting means for detecting that the second condition is satisfied, Detection by the condition establishment detection means may be performed simultaneously. For this reason, when the timing when the detection by the two condition establishment detection means is performed at the same time (the timing of the first success / failure determination process) and the timing of starting the fluctuation display (the timing of the second success / failure determination process) overlap. In such a case, the risk that processing to be executed within a certain period of time becomes an amount that cannot be processed within a certain period of time, resulting in a processing failure. On the other hand, in this means 21 (similar to the above means 19), the maximum number of times of the determination in the second winning / failing determination process can be greatly reduced, and the game control can be performed accurately (without causing a processing failure). )It can be carried out.

Means 22. First condition satisfaction detecting means for detecting that the first condition is satisfied;
Second condition satisfaction detecting means for detecting that the second condition is satisfied;
In response to the respective detections by the first and second condition establishment detection means, whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player is determined, and a special gaming state is determined when winning is determined by the winning / losing lottery. Main control means to generate,
Variable display means for performing variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination,
The main control means includes
A random number generating means used for the success / failure lottery;
Winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the success / failure random number generating means, as winning corresponding values to be won in the winning / losing lottery,
A holding storage area capable of storing predetermined information used to determine the contents of the variable display,
The winning correspondence values stored in the winning value storage means are grouped in advance, and the winning value storage means is set with identification information for identifying each group,
The holding storage area is a plurality of holdings capable of storing predetermined information used for determining the contents of variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination performed based on the detection by the first condition satisfaction detecting means. Predetermined information used for determining the contents of the variable display for teaching the first special variable holding area having the area and the result of the lottery determination performed based on the detection by the second condition satisfaction detecting means A second special variable holding area having a plurality of holding areas that can be stored, and one execution area;
A determination value extraction process for extracting the value of the success / failure random number generation means, triggered by the respective detections by the first and second condition establishment detection means,
Determination value storage processing for storing the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction processing in the reserved area in which the predetermined information is not stored in the first or second special variable reserved storage area When,
A first success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process matches a winning correspondence value stored in the winning value storage means;
At least in the first success / failure determination process, when it is determined that the value of the success / failure random number generation means matches the value corresponding to the winning correspondence, the winning correspondence value that matches the value of the success / failure random number generation means belongs to the group A group information storing process for storing the corresponding identification information;
A special effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect over a plurality of variable displays based on the result of the first success / failure determination process;
Prior to execution of variable display in the variable display means, a shift process for shifting the predetermined information stored in the holding area of the first or second special variable holding storage area to the execution area side,
Of the winning correspondence values stored in the winning value storage means, (at least first) the group corresponding to the identification information corresponding to the predetermined information stored in the execution area of the holding storage area by the shift process It is determined whether or not the winning correspondence value belonging to the value of the winning random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process matches, and a special gaming state is generated based on the determination result A second success / failure determination process for determining whether or not
A gaming machine that performs a variable display setting process for setting a variable display based on a result of the second winning / failing determination process.

  According to the means 22, the same operational effects as the means 21 are basically obtained.

Means 23. When the value of the success / failure random number generation means is stored in the first special fluctuation reservation area and the second special fluctuation reservation area, the value of the success / failure random number generation means stored in the second special fluctuation reservation area After all the fluctuation display based on the above is digested, the fluctuation display based on the value of the success / failure random number generation means stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is started,
The special effect determination process
As a result of the first success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted based on the detection of the first condition satisfaction detection means matches the value stored in the winning value storage means. A first special effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect over a plurality of variable displays,
As a result of the first success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted based on the detection of the second condition establishment detection means matches the value stored in the winning value storage means. And a second special effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect over a plurality of variable displays,
Regarding the first special effect determination process,
Of the holding areas of the first and second special variable holding areas, the holding area in which the result of the first winning / failing determination process is stored (the first winning / failing subject to the first special effect determining process). The first special effect determination process is executed when there are two or more in total (including the holding area in which the result of the determination process is stored),
Of the holding areas of the first and second special variable holding areas, the holding area in which the result of the first winning / failing determination process is stored (the first winning / failing subject to the first special effect determining process). If the total is less than two (including the holding area in which the result of the determination process is stored), the execution of the first special effect determination process is avoided,
Regarding the second special effect determination process,
For the two or more reserved areas of the second special variable reserved area (including the reserved area where the result of the first success / failure determination process that is the target of the second special effect determining process is stored) 1 When the result of the determination process is stored, the second special effect determination process is executed,
Of the reserved areas of the second special variation reserved area, the reserved area in which the result of the first success / failure determination process is stored (the result of the first success / failure determination process to be the target of the second special effect determination process) The game machine according to means 21 or 22, wherein the execution of the second special effect determination process is avoided when there is only one (including a holding area in which is stored).

  According to the means 23, the same effect as the said means 5 is show | played.

Means 24. When the value of the success / failure random number generation means is stored in the first special fluctuation reservation area and the second special fluctuation reservation area, the value of the success / failure random number generation means stored in the second special fluctuation reservation area After all the fluctuation display based on the above is digested, the fluctuation display based on the value of the success / failure random number generation means stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is started,
The effect mode used for the specific effect over the plurality of variable displays is an effect mode that can be derived even when the specific effect over the multiple variable displays is not performed.
Or
Even if it is determined to execute the specific effect over the plurality of variation displays in the special effect determination process, the specific effect is derived for each variation display with respect to the corresponding multiple variation display. The gaming machine according to any one of means 21 to 23, wherein it is determined whether or not.

  According to the means 24, the same effect as the means 6 is exhibited.

Means 25. Sub-control means for controlling the production based on a command from the main control means,
The sub-control unit includes a holding information storage area having a plurality of holding areas capable of storing information related to the variable display output from the main control unit,
The main control means includes
A primary output process for outputting, to the sub-control means, information related to setting of a variable display including a result of the first success / failure determination process when the first success / failure determination process is performed;
A secondary output process for outputting information on the variable display set in the variable display setting process to the sub-control means,
The sub-control means includes
A hold information storage process for storing information output during the primary output process from the main control means in the hold area in which no information is stored in the variable information storage area;
The special effect that determines whether or not to execute the specific effect over the plurality of variable displays based on information (such as a result of the first success / failure determination process) output from the main control unit during the primary output process The decision process,
Based on the information output during the secondary output process from the main control means, a fluctuation creation process for creating a fluctuation display,
The specific effect setting process for setting the specific effect on the variation display created in the variation creation process based on the result of the special effect determination process is performed. Game machines.

  According to the means 25, the same effect as that of the means 7 can be obtained.

Means 26. The sub-control means includes
Continuous production random number generating means used for continuous production lottery of whether or not to execute the specific production over the plurality of fluctuation displays;
As a value to be won in the continuous effect lottery, continuous effect winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among values that can be generated by the continuous effect random number generating means;
When winning in the continuous effect lottery, the continuous effect type random number generating means used when determining the type of the specific configuration effect to be derived for each variable display among the specific effects over the plurality of variable displays,
As a value corresponding to each of the specific configuration effects, comprising a continuous effect type determination value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values included in the continuous effect type random number generation means,
A plurality of the continuous effect winning value storage means and the continuous effect type determination value storage means are provided,
The special effect determination process
When the information output during the primary output process is received from the main control means, a continuous effect determination value extracting process for extracting each value of the continuous effect random number generating means and the continuous effect type random number generating means;
Each value of the continuous effect random number generating means and the continuous effect type random number generating means extracted in the continuous effect determination value extracting process is stored in the reserved area where no information is stored in the reserved information storage area. Continuous production information storage processing;
Based on the predetermined information output in the primary output process from the main control means, the continuous effect winning value storage means to be considered among the plurality of continuous effect winning value storage means is selected, and the continuous effect determination value extraction is performed. A continuous production success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the value of the continuous production random number generation means extracted in the process matches the value stored in the selected continuous production winning value storage means;
A continuous production result storage process for storing the result of the continuous production success / failure determination process,
The specific effect setting process includes:
When the result of the continuous production success / failure determination process indicates a match between the value of the continuous production random number generation unit and the value of the continuous production random value storage unit, the main control unit outputs the secondary output process. Based on the information, a continuous production type determination value storage unit to be considered among the plurality of continuous production type determination value storage units is selected, and the continuous production type determination value storage unit is taken into consideration, and the continuous production type is selected. A configuration effect type determination process for determining the specific configuration effect based on the value of the random number generation means;
The gaming machine according to claim 25, further comprising: a configuration effect setting process for setting the specific configuration effect to a variable display based on a result of the configuration effect type determination process.

  According to the means 26, the same effect as the said means 8 is show | played.

Means 27. A first game mode (low probability state) in which the winning / losing lottery is performed with a first probability predetermined as a probability of winning the special gaming state;
There is a second game mode (high probability state) in which the success / failure lottery is performed with a second probability that the probability of winning the special gaming state is higher than the first probability,
The game mode can be switched before the special game state occurs and after the special game state ends,
The value of the success / failure random number generation means to be won in the second game mode includes the value of (all) the success / failure random number generation means to be won in the first game mode,
Of the winning correspondence values stored in the winning value storage means, the winning correspondence value to be won in the winning lottery in the first game mode is:
27. The gaming machine according to any one of means 19 to 26, wherein only in the second game mode, the game machines are grouped in such a way that they are distinguished from winning corresponding values that will be won in the winning / losing lottery.

  According to the means 27, the winning value storage means considered in the first game mode and the winning value storage means considered in the second game mode are not provided separately, but the first and second games are provided. The same winning value storage means is also taken into consideration in the mode. Specifically, in the second game mode (high probability state), whether or not all winning correspondence values stored in the winning value storage means match with the value of the winning random number generating means is determined as to whether or not the winning is determined. In the first game mode (low probability state), among the winning correspondence values stored in the winning value storage means, the winning corresponding value and the winning random number that are won in the winning lottery in the first gaming mode. Whether or not the value matches the value of the generation means can be determined. In particular, in this means, the value of the success / failure random number generation means that is won in the second game mode includes the value of the success / failure random number generation means that is won in the first game mode. Therefore, when the winning value storage means is made common as described above, the winning value storage means can be simplified. Further, the winning correspondence values that are won in the winning lottery in the first game mode are distinguished from the winning corresponding values that are won in the winning lottery only in the second gaming mode and are grouped. For example, if the winning value in the high probability state is “1-20” and the winning value in the low probability state is “1, 2”, “1, 2” is assigned to one group. Thus, even if the winning value storage means is not provided for each game mode, the determination of success / failure in each game mode can be performed relatively smoothly and reliably.

  The value of the success / failure random number generation means that is won in the second game mode includes the values of all the success / failure random number generation means that are won in the first game mode, and the winning value storage Among the winning correspondence values stored in the means, the winning correspondence value that is won in the winning lottery in both the first and second gaming modes is only in the second gaming mode. It may be distinguished from the winning correspondence value that will be won in the winning / losing lottery.

Means 28. A first game mode (low probability state) in which the winning / losing lottery is performed with a first probability predetermined as a probability of winning the special gaming state;
There is a second game mode (high probability state) in which the success / failure lottery is performed with a second probability that the probability of winning the special gaming state is higher than the first probability,
The game mode can be switched before the special game state occurs and after the special game state ends,
(1) In the first success / failure determination process, the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process is determined by the first and second game modes in the first and second game modes. In the gaming mode, it is determined whether or not the value corresponds to the winning corresponding value won in the winning lottery, and the value of the winning random number generating means extracted in the determination value extracting process is the second gaming mode. Whether or not it matches the winning corresponding value to be won in the winning lottery,
In the first and second game determination modes, the group information storage process determines whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means is equal to that in the first game mode in the first game mode. When it is determined that the winning correspondence value won in the winning lottery and the winning correspondence value won in the winning lottery in the second game mode match, the value of the winning random number generation means Storing the identification information corresponding to the group to which the corresponding winning correspondence value belongs,
(2) When the second winning / failing determination process is performed in the second game mode, the winning corresponding value belonging to the group corresponding to the identification information and the determination It is determined whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the value extraction process matches, and based on the result of the determination, it is determined whether or not to generate a special gaming state,
When the second success / failure determination process is performed in the first game mode, the success / failure random number generation extracted in the determination value extraction process in the second success / failure determination process regardless of the identification information. 28. The gaming machine according to any one of means 19 to 27, wherein it is determined whether or not the value of the means matches a winning corresponding value won in the winning lottery in the first game mode.

  (1) For example, the identification information is stored only when it is determined in the first success / failure determination process that the value of the success / failure random number generation means matches the winning correspondence value corresponding to the game mode at that time. The following problems occur. For example, when the first success / failure determination process is performed in the first game mode, and the corresponding second success / failure determination process is performed in the second game mode, the value of the extracted success / failure random number generation means is If the winning lottery value is won only in the second game mode, the identification information is not stored in the group information storing process, and it is determined that the second winning / nothing determination process is a failure. There is a risk that.

  On the other hand, according to the means 28, only when it is determined that the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process is a value won in the success / failure lottery at the timing of the first success / failure determination process. Even if it is determined that the winning lottery value is determined when the game mode is changed, the corresponding identification information is stored even though it is not a value winning the winning lottery at the timing of the first winning / failing determination process. It is the composition to do. For this reason, the said malfunction can be avoided and the situation where a player suffers a disadvantage by unjustly losing the right of a special game state can be prevented.

  (2) Also, for example, the identification information is stored in the group information storage process by extracting the value of the success / failure random number generating means which is not won in the first game mode but is won in the second game mode, Further, when the corresponding second success / failure determination process is performed in the first game mode, the winning correspondence value of the group corresponding to the identification information and the extracted value of the success / failure random number generation means in the second winning / failure determination process. In the second winning / nothing determination process, even though the extracted value of the winning / random number generating means is a value that does not win the winning / failing lottery in the first game mode. There is a risk of being determined to be a winner or processing may be delayed. Specifically, for example, when winning value storage means are provided corresponding to each game mode, the winning corresponding to the second game mode in the group information storage process based on the result of the first win / fail determination process Although the identification information is stored corresponding to the value storage means, the second identification determination process corresponding to the first determination determination process is performed in the first game mode, so the stored identification information is the first game. There is a concern that the winning value storage means corresponding to the mode does not correspond. Further, for example, when the winning value storage means is made common as in the above-described means 27, if the identification information is taken into consideration in the second winning / failing determination process performed in the first game mode, In one game mode, it is determined whether or not the winning correspondence value of the group that is not won matches the value of the winning random number generating means is unnecessarily determined, and if it is further matched, it is determined that a special gaming state occurs. There is concern.

  On the other hand, according to the present means 28, when the second winning / failing determination process is performed in the first game mode, in the second winning / failing determination process, regardless of the identification information, the determination value extraction process is performed. It is configured to determine whether or not the extracted value of the success / failure random number generation means matches the winning correspondence value won in the winning / failing lottery in the first game mode stored in the winning value storage means. For this reason, the said malfunction can be avoided and a success / failure determination can be performed reliably. In addition, when in the first game mode (low probability state), since the number of winning corresponding values to be won in the winning lottery is small, it is not necessary to forcibly reduce the number of determinations in the second winning / deciding determination process as described above. Therefore, the game control can be sufficiently handled without causing any trouble.

  If the configuration of this means is adopted, for example, the value of the success / failure random number extraction means extracted in the judgment value extraction process is a value that is won only in the second game mode, and the success / failure random number generation is performed. When the variable display corresponding to the value of the means is performed in the first game mode, the special game state is not given even if the “continuous notice” occurs. Therefore, only in such a situation, if a “continuous notice” can be derived in spite of the fact that no special gaming state occurs, the special game state can be used in the second gaming mode when such a situation occurs. The player knows that the gaming state should have occurred, and there is a risk that the interest will be significantly reduced. For this reason, it is desirable that the “continuous notice” can be generated in advance even when the special gaming state is not given.

Means 29. When the variable display means performs a variable display indicating that the winning lottery has been won, a reach state in which a specific mode is derived in the variable display means occurs before the result is displayed. In addition, the reach state can occur even when the variable display means performs a variable display indicating that the winning lottery is not won,
The main control means includes
Reach random number generating means used for determining whether to generate a reach state;
Reach determination value storage means for storing a predetermined value among values that can be generated by the reach random number generation means as a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach state,
During the determination value extraction process, the value of the reach random number generation means is also extracted,
In the determination value storing process, the extracted value of the reach random number generation means is also stored,
In the case where at least the result of the first success / failure determination process indicates a mismatch between the value of the success / failure random number generation means and the value of the winning value storage means, the reach determination value storage means is taken into consideration and the extraction is performed in the determination value extraction process Performing a first reach determination process for determining whether a reach state occurs based on the value of the reach random number generation means
In the special effect determination process, it is determined whether to execute the specific effect based on the results of the primary success / failure determination process and the first reach determination process,
Prior to the execution of variable display in the variable display means, a second reach determination process is performed to determine whether or not to generate a reach state,
The gaming machine according to any one of means 19 to 28, wherein the variation display setting process is performed based on a result of the second success / failure determination process and the second reach determination process.

  According to the means 29, it is determined whether or not to execute the specific effect based on the results of the primary success / failure determination process and the first reach determination process. In other words, depending on the result of the lottery determination (whether or not a special state occurs), not only does the rate at which “continuous notice” is derived, but also whether or not a reach state occurs even when the result is “out” The rate at which “continuous notice” is derived can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to make more detailed settings for “continuous notice”, thereby further enhancing the interest.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

  A. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball game machine. As a more detailed mode example, “an operation means (game ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (shot motor, etc.) for playing and launching a game ball based on an operation of the operation means, A ball ball game machine including a game area where a game ball is guided and each ball entry means (general prize opening, variable prize winning device, operation opening, etc.) arranged in the game area.

  B. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a bullet ball gaming machine having a gaming area extending in a substantially vertical direction. As a more detailed mode example, “an operation means (game ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (shot motor, etc.) for playing and launching a game ball based on an operation of the operation means, The game balls are guided and extended along a substantially vertical direction (for example, the game area is constituted by a game board surface), and each ball entry means (general winning mouth, And a ball game machine configured to be able to visually recognize the behavior of a game ball flowing down the game area.

  C. The gaming machine in each of the above means or each of the above ball game machines is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine equivalent to a pachinko machine.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 33 ... Start winning unit, 33a ... Top prize opening, 33b ... Bottom prize opening, 42 ... Decoration symbol display apparatus which comprises variable display means, 43L, 43R ... Special display apparatus which comprises variable display means, 224a, 224b: start winning switch as condition establishment detection means, 261: main control apparatus as main control means, 262 ... sub control apparatus as sub control means.

Claims (1)

Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established;
Based on the detection of the condition establishment detection means, a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and a main control means for generating a special gaming state when winning in the lottery,
Variable display means for performing variable display for teaching the result of the lottery,
Random number generating means used for the lottery,
As a value to be won in the lottery, winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the success / failure random number generating means;
A holding storage area having a plurality of holding areas capable of storing predetermined information used to determine the content of variable display in the variable display means,
A discriminant value extraction process for extracting the value of the random number generation means based on the detection of the condition establishment detection means;
A discriminant value storing process for storing the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the discriminant value extracting process in any of the reserved areas of the reserved storage area;
A first success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means extracted in the determination value extraction process matches a value stored in the winning value storage means;
A result storage process for storing a result of the first determination result;
A specific effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect in a plurality of variable displays, based on the result of the first success / failure determination process;
Prior to the execution of the variable display in the variable display means, a second winning / failing determination process for determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state based on the result of the first winning / failing determination process;
A variable display setting process for performing a variable display setting based on a result of the second determination result;
A first game mode in which the lottery is performed with a predetermined first probability as a probability of winning the special game state;
There is a second game mode in which the lottery is performed with a second probability that the probability of winning the special gaming state is higher than the first probability,
The game mode is switchable so that the game mode is different before the special game state occurs and after the special game state ends.
In the first success / failure determination process,
A common winning value determination process for determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number generation means is a value to be won in the lottery in either the first game mode or the second game mode;
A limited winning value for determining whether or not the value of the random number generation means is a value that is won in the lottery in the second game mode, but is a value that is not won in the lottery in the first game mode. Discrimination processing;
A first determination result setting process in which the first winning / failing determination result holding unit is set to a positive determination state when an affirmative determination is made in the common winning value determination process;
A second determination result setting process for setting the second winning / failing determination result holding means to an affirmative determination state when an affirmative determination is made in the limited winning value determination process, in either the first game mode or the second game mode. Run even if there is
In the second success / failure determination process,
Determining whether or not it is the first game mode, and determining whether or not it is the second game mode;
A first game mode time determination process for determining whether or not the first determination result holding unit is in an affirmative determination state when it is determined in the mode determination process that the first game mode is set;
When it is determined in the mode determination process that the game mode is the second game mode, it is determined whether or not the first determination result holding means or the second determination result holding means is in an affirmative determination state. A gaming machine that executes a two-game mode determination process.

Images